Anritsu Manual Metal Detector Kds2105anw

Operation Manual
Metal Detector
M6-h Series
9th Edition
This manual covers the software versions V5.02 or later.
* Actual products may differ from photographs / pictures / illustrations in this manual.
* Content current as of May 2021
* All rights reserved. No part of this manual may be reproduced without the prior written permission of
ANRITSU CORPORATION.
* The operational instructions of this manual may be changed without prior notice.
For safety and warning information, please read this manual before attempting to use the equipment.
Keep this manual with the equipment.
Models Covered by This Manual
This manual is for use with the following models. Please check the model number printed on
the nameplate.
Product Models
KDS2105ABF KDS3005ABF KDS4505ABF
KDS2105ABW KDS3005ABW KDS4505ABW
KDS2105ABFT KDS3005ABFT KDS4505ABFT
KDS2105ABWT KDS3005ABWT KDS4505ABWT
KDS3012ABF KDS4515ABF
KDS3012ABW KDS4515ABW
KDS3012ABFT KDS4515ABFT
KDS3012ABWT KDS4515ABWT
KDS3015ABF KDS4518ABF
KDS3015ABW KDS4518ABW
KDS3015ABFT KDS4518ABFT
KDS3015ABWT KDS4518ABWT
KDS3018ABF
KDS3018ABW
KDS3018ABFT
KDS3018ABWT
2
Introduction
Read the operation manual thoroughly before using the product. Keep the operation manual with the product for
easy reference.
(1) Structure of the operation manual

Title of document Description To be read by
• Safety information common to all
products
Operation Manual - Manager and equipment
• Operation information common to
Before Use maintenance personnel
all products
• Warranty terms
• Installation
Manager and equipment
Operation Manual (this document) • Details on how to operate
maintenance personnel
• Maintenance
Manager: Personnel who supervises and manages the operators.

Equipment maintenance personnel: Personnel who manages installation, connection, equipment inspection, and
maintenance.
Operator: Personnel who regularly uses this machine.
(2) Symbols used in the text

In this document, the following symbols are used.
Symbol Description
 Indicates another page for reference.
Indicates supplementary notes and related information.
Indicates the type of spanner for the work

7: 7-mm spanner for M4 hexagonal bolts
Phillips head screwdriver
Indicates the works that use a precision screwdriver.
3
Contents
■ Models Covered by This Manual ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 2 ● Adjusting Touch Screen ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 114
■ Introduction ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 3 ● Checking Version Info ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 115
■ Contents ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 4 ● Changing and Initializing Password ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 115
■ Safety Symbolsꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 6 ● Setting the Date and Time ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 117
■ M6-h Series Metal Detector ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 7 ● Setting the Language ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 118
■ Checking the Package Contents ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 8 ● Changing the Display Language ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 118
■ Names and Functions ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 9 ● Setting Conveyor Speed ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ121
■ Description of Operation Screen ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 13 ● Statistics Control ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ122
● Security and Rules ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ123
1 Basic Operations ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 24 ● Specifying the installation check settings ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ126
■ Turning on the System for the First Time ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 25 ● Other Functions ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ127
■ Basic Usage ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 27 ● Setting Screen Brightness and
● Turning On/Off Power ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 27 Key Touch Operation ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ133
● Changing Access Levelꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 27 ● Entering Device Information ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ134
● Operating and Stopping ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 29 ■ Options and Peripheral Devices ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 135
● Registering a New Product ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 30 ● Setting Signal Tower and Buzzer (option) ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ135
● Checking Operations ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 39 ● Setting a Printer (option) ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ140
● Adjusting Registered Products ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 40 ● Setting Rejector ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ148
● Handling Errors and Alarms ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 50 ● Adjusting the cross plateꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ153
● If NG frequently occurs ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 52 ● Adjusting the cross roller ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ154
● Investigating the cause of incorrect detections ꞏꞏꞏꞏ 53 ● Adjusting the product guide ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ154
■ Daily Operation Procedure ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 57 ■ Other Useful Functions ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 155

● Using Smart Guide ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ155
2 Advanced Operations ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 58 ● Displaying Product List ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ164
■ Screen Hierarchy ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 59 ● Copying and Deleting Registered Product ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ165
■ Viewing Inspection Data ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 62 ● Clearing Statistics ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ166
● Basic display ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 62 ● Setting All Products ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ166
● Statistics ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 63 ● Customizing the Items Displayed in Submenu ꞏꞏꞏ 167
● General ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 64 ● Using Conveyor Modeꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ169
■ Adjusting Equipment ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 65 ● Viewing History ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ170
● Auto-setting again ● Setting Access Level By Function ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ172
(Readjusting registered products) ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 65 ● Using Check Mode ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ174
● Adjusting the RJ timing ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 68 ● Registering Products Using Other Auto Setting
■ Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 69 Methods ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ175
● Saving Data to the USB Memory (option) ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 69 ● Correcting the Phase based on Characteristic
Change (Product check function) ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ178
● Setting External I/O Signals ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 84
● Changing the Metal Detection Sensitivity ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ180
● Adjusting I/O Timing ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 107
● Chronologically Viewing the Effect Value of the
● Connecting Ethernet (LAN) (option)ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 108
Product (Product effect monitor) ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ186
■ Other Settings and Adjustments ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 114
● Checking the Effects such as External Noise
● Performing an installation check ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 114
(Noise monitor) ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ189
4
● Using FOCUS Setting Function ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 192 ■ Ethernet Connection ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 286
● Setting Default Values at ■ Timing Chart ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 288
Product Registrationꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 197 ■ Specifications ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 289
1 Basic Operations
■ Copyright, etc. ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 299
3 Installation and Connection ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 200 ■ CE Conformity Markingꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 300
■ Selecting Installation Location and
Transportation ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 201
■ Installation ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 204
■ Connecting External Equipment ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 206
■ Connecting Power Supply and Grounding,
Turning On the Power ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 209
2 Advanced Operations
4 Maintenance ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 210
■ Daily Maintenanceꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 211
● Daily Maintenance ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 211
● Weekly Maintenance ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 212
■ Cleaning ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 213

● Non-waterproof specification (IP30)ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 213
● Waterproof specification (IP66)ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 213
3 Installation and Connection

● Maintenance of Stainless Steel ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 216
■ Installing/Removing Components ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 217

● Installing/Removing the Conveyor Part ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 217
● Replacing the Conveyor Belt ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 223
● Adjusting Belt Alignment ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 225
■ Check Items for Failure ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 229

● Troubleshooting ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 229
● Outputting support data

(only when the USB memory option is used) ꞏꞏꞏ 238
● Forced Operation ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 240 4 Maintenance

■ Error Messages and Solutions ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 245
■ Adjusting Photocell ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 267
5 Appendix ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 270

■ Consumables ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 271
■ Spare Parts ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 273
■ Connecting the Terminal Block Connector
and Push-Type Terminal Block ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 277
■ External I/O Specifications ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 278
5 Appendix
■ RJ Output Specification ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 282

■ RJ-I/F Unit (Optional)
RJ I/O Specifications ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 283
5
Safety Symbols
To prevent the risk of personal injury or loss related to equipment malfunction, Anritsu Corporation (Anritsu) uses
the following safety symbols to indicate safety-related information. Insure that you clearly understand the meanings
of the symbols BEFORE using the equipment. Some or all of the symbols may not be used on this equipment. In
addition, when drawings are included in this manual, labels on the equipment may not be shown on them.
Safety Symbols Used in Manual
This indicates a very dangerous procedure that could result in death or serious
DANGER injury if not performed properly.
This indicates a hazardous procedure that could result in death or serious injury
WARNING if not performed properly.
This indicates a hazardous procedure or danger that could result in light-to-severe

CAUTION injury, or loss related to equipment malfunction, if proper precautions are not taken.
Safety Symbols Used on Equipment and/or in Manual
The following safety symbols are used inside or on the equipment near operation locations, and/or in manual to
provide information about safety items and operation precautions. Insure that you clearly understand the meanings
of the symbols and take the necessary precautions BEFORE using the equipment.
This indicates a prohibited operation. The prohibited operation is indicated in or

near the barred circle.
This indicates an obligatory safety precaution. The obligatory operation is

indicated in or near the circle.
This indicates a warning or caution. The contents are indicated in or near the
triangle.
This indicates a note. The contents are described in the box.
These indicate that the marked part should be recycled, or be disposed in

accordance with local laws.
6
M6-h Series Metal Detector
M6-h Series Metal Detector uses two simultaneous magnetic

fields at different frequencies to inspect products flowing on a
conveyor. When it detects a signal above a set level caused by
metal contamination, it outputs a metal contamination alarm or a
rejection signal to a connected rejector.
The M6-h series metal detector has the following features:
High detection capability

The system sets detection limits precisely and automatically for
optimal detection based on analysis of product and
contaminant properties.
Operator panel with color LCD touch screen

The display enables the operator to view the status quickly and
operate intuitively.
Management functions via USB and Ethernet

interface
Connection to a USB or LAN improves ease of data
management.
* Ethernet ports are standard specifications include Ethernet
(LAN) connection to QUICCA.
Standard I/O capabilities for monitoring and line

integration
Functions for monitoring and adjusting the line conditions and
functions to support complex inspections have been enhanced.
7
Checking the Package Contents
Make sure that all of the following items are present. If any item is damaged or missing, please contact us.
□ Main unit 1
□ Operation Manual 1 set

□ Operation Manual -
Before Use 1
□ Operation Manual 1
* The test pieces are optional.
ＦｅＳｕｓ３０４
Using test pieces

▪ Be sure to check that test pieces do not appear abnormal or damaged before use.
If a test piece appears abnormal or damaged, stop using the test piece immediately and
replace it with a new one.
▪ If the test piece will come into direct contact with food, or will come into contact with liquid, oil,
or pharmaceutical products, place the test piece in a hygienically controlled plastic bag
before use. (Use a plastic bag that will not cause the metal detector to react.)
▪ It is recommended to periodically inspect or replace test pieces.
For details about inspection and replacement, contact Anritsu or your local distributor.
8
Names and Functions
● Main unit
[1] Indicator
[1] Processes signals from detector head,
displays product contamination status and
[2] [3]
controls metal detector functions.
[2] Detector head
Detects metals in the products
[3] Conveyor unit
Conveys products to be inspected.
[4] [4] Stand
Supports the indicator and conveyor unit.
● Indicator
[1] Operation screen

[2] Displays evaluation results, statistics data,
[1] and is used to start or stop operations and
for various settings.
[2] Power switch
Turns the power of the metal detector on
and off.
● Detector head
[1] Photocell
Sensor for detecting the location of a
product.
[2] Reflector
[1] [2] Reflective plate for reflecting photocell
beam.
* The photocell and the reflector are always
installed at the upstream position of
product flow direction.
9
Names and Functions
● Conveyor unit
KDS21XX/30XX/45XX ABF/ABFT
[1] Motor
A motor to drive conveyor.
[2] Tension roller
[1] A roller to tighten the conveyor belt.
[3] Connection plate (2 pieces)
Plates for mounting rejector (option).
[4] Tension adjusters
(only KDSXXXXABF/ABFT)
Tension adjusters for conveyor belt to
adjust after belt replacement.
[2] [5] Catch clip

Clip for securing conveyor.
[3]
[5]
[4]
KDS21XX/30XX/45XX ABW/ABWT
[1] Motor
A motor to drive conveyor.
[2] Tension roller
[1] A roller to tighten the conveyor belt.
[3] Connection plate (2 pieces)
Plates for mounting rejector (option).
[4] Catch clip
[2] Clip for securing conveyor.
[4] [3]
10
Names and Functions
■ Conveyor part
KDS21XX/30XX/45XX ABF/ABFT
[1] Conveyor belt
[2] Driven roller
[1] [3] Drive roller
[4]
[4] Drive belt
[2]
[3]
KDS21XX/30XX/45XX ABW/ABWT
[1] Drive roller
[1] [2] Conveyor belt
[3] Coupling
[2]
[4] Driven roller
[3]
[4]
11
Names and Functions
● Operation screen
[4] [5]
Push-button switches
[1] [Start] button
[7] Starts the operation of the metal detector.
[2] [Stop] button
[8] Stops the operation of the metal detector.
[9] [6] [3] [Home] button
[10] Displays the Smart guide screen.
[11]
[12] [3] [2] [1]

Touch screen type color LCD display operation panel
[4] Product display
Displays the current product and product name.
[5] Statistics display
Displays the number of Total and OK and NG products.
[6] Metal detection level
Displays the effect value of the current product.
[7] Switch the product.
Tap this to display a screen on which you can select a new product.
[8] Register new product.
Tap this to start registration of a new product.
[9] Check sensitivity.
Tap this to move to the check mode screen, on which the production statistics are not
counted.
[10] Adjust sensitivity.
Tap this to move to a screen on which you can adjust the sensitivity.
[11] Others
Tap this to display submenus such as Clear statistics.
Others
[12] USB port
Used for inserting a USB memory for data storage (sold separately).
12
Description of Operation Screen
● Metal detection level bar and evaluation result icons
The test result for metal contamination is displayed by the metal detection level bar and icons as
shown below.
[For metal contamination checks] ( P. 35 Registering a New Product – Step 9)
Metal detection level bar Icon Detection result
No metal contamination
The metal effect value has
not reached the metal
The red light is not turned on. contamination evaluation

limit.
Metal-contaminated product
Red lights (1 to 4 on the right side) reached the metal
turn on. contamination evaluation
limit.
- Metal contamination check 1 -

• When products are being conveyed: Updates the effect values every time a product is
fed.
• When products are not being conveyed: Updates the effect values every 100 ms.
- Metal contamination check 2, 3, 4 -

• When MDNG products are being conveyed: Updates the effect values at the timing of
the MDNG evaluation.
• When MDNG products are not being conveyed: The effect values are not updated.
However, on the "Sensitivity Adjustment" screen and "Sensitivity Adjustment 2" screen
( P. 180 Changing the Metal Detection Sensitivity), the effect values are updated every
100ms.
13
[For missing product checks ( P. 36 Registering a New Product – Step 9)
Metal detection level bar Icon Detection result

No missing product
The metal effect value
Red lights (1 to 4 on the right side)
exceeds the missing product
turn on.
evaluation limit.
Missing product
not reached the missing
The red light is not turned on. product evaluation limit.
- Missing product check -

• When products are being conveyed: Updates the effect values every time a product is
fed.
• When products are not being conveyed: Updates the effect values every 100 ms.
14
● Adjusting detection sensitivity
"Sensitivity Adjustment 2" screen:
The evaluation limit magnification can be adjusted while checking the latest information and
the nine previous items of information.
* For bulk inspection, the maximum value is recorded every 10 seconds, and the nine
previous items of information are displayed.
ML1/ML2, ML3/ML4 tab

ML1/ML2 tab: Displays the detection sensitivity for ML1 and ML2.
Increases the evaluation limit magnification value

(lowers the detection sensitivity).
Evaluation limit magnification value
Lowers the evaluation limit magnification value
Effect value indicator (increases the detection sensitivity).
"Sensitivity Adjustment" screen:

Evaluation limit
Detection sensitivity
magnification value
Increase Lower
Decrease Raise
Evaluation limit magnification value

Tap this to directly input values.
Sensitivity mode Effect value indicator

Displays the predetermined auto-setting values. Indicates the real-time effect values.
15
● Icon display
At the top of the operation screen, the icons are displayed to show the state of network, USB
memory and code reader.
(QUICCA, USB memory and code reader are optional.)
Network (QUICCA)*1 USB memory*2 Screen (Code reader)*3
Connected Inserted Able to

correctly read
correctly
Disconnected
Data stored in the

metal detector while
disconnected
Network (Other)
Connected correctly
Disconnected
*1 Indicates the connecting status of QUICCA (Quality Management and Control System
Software by Anritsu)
*2 Appears when inserting a USB memory when an optional USB memory is used.
*3 The animation of code reader is displayed while the bar code (Item code etc.) is readable.
● Operation and input method

■ Touch screen buttons
To start functions, press button or the information area on the screen.
Example 1 [Menu]
The first layer of the setting menu is called.
When a button is pressed, the detailed
setting menu is displayed.
16
Example 2 [Others]
When a button is pressed, the submenu is
displayed above the button. When an item
is pressed, the function is called directly
without opening another menu.
■ Information display area of the touch screen

When the information display area in the frame is pressed, the related settings and display
screens are called.
Example 1: When the product display frame is

pressed, the “Product Table” screen is
displayed.
“Product List” screen
Example 2: When "Clear Stats" is pressed

from the "Others" submenu, the display
moves to the "Clear Stats" dialog box.
"Clear Stats" dialog box
17
■ Settings screen (menu)

Inspection conditions and metal detector operation are set.
When an item in the list is pressed, a setting input screen or a setting list of deeper layer is
displayed.
The cursor moves to the previous page.

Keep pressing to let it move continuously.
When the cursor reaches to the first page, it moves
to the last page.
The cursor moves to one line above.

The keypad is displayed to enter list number

directly.
The cursor moves to one line below.

The cursor moves to the next page.

When the cursor reaches to the last page, it moves
to the first page.
■ Setting selection
When a setting is to be selected from the
provided options, a list screen containing the
options is displayed.
Select an option (the selected option is
highlighted) and press the [OK] button to
specify the option.
18
■ Software keypad
When a numeric value is to be entered, the keypad is displayed.
Enter a number and press the [OK] button to set the value.
BS key
Deletes the last digit.
▲ key
Increases the value by 1.
▼ key
Decreases the value by 1.
C key
Clears the input value to 0.
+/- key
Reverses positive and negative.
19
■ Software Keyboard
When characters are to be entered, a software keyboard is displayed.
Enter characters and press the [OK] button to set the characters.
Character type selection key BS key

Switches over [ABC], [NUM], and [Symbol]. Deletes the last character before the
cursor.
< > key

Moves the cursor by one character.
Aa key
Switches upper case
and lower case.
Num key
Switches to input
number.
Space key
Enters one space.
20
Press the selection key at the top-left corner of the screen to switch.
Entering letters
When [A/a] is pressed, the button is
highlighted. Input is switched to
lower-case letters.
Entering Korean characters

When the display language is changed to
Korean, the Korean keyboard screen is
displayed.
Press the [엔터키] (Confirm) button to
confirm the composition of the Korean

characters.
 P. 118 Changing the Display Language
Entering Chinese characters

When the display language is changed to
Chinese, the Chinese keyboard screen is
displayed.
Press the [ 转变 ] (Convert) button to
convert the alphabetic characters into

Chinese characters.
Korean and Chinese product names do not support output to USB memory, printer, or serial (it is
replaced with "?" when output).
21
Entering numbers
In addition to numbers, frequently used
units and symbols can be entered.
Entering symbols
Other symbols can be entered.
■ Displaying optional functions

This operation manual includes descriptions of buttons and menus that appear only when
optional devices are installed. The display might differ depending on configurations.
22
Memo
23
1 Basic Operations
This chapter describes the basic operations.
1 Basic Operations
Turning on the System for the First Time 25
Basic Usage 27
Daily Operation Procedure 57
24
Turning on the System for the First Time
1 Turning on the power.

 P. 27 Turning On/Off Power
2 When the system is started for the first
1 Basic Operations
time after it has been delivered, the
Confirmation at installation screen, which
provides cautions for using the system
safely, is displayed. Be sure to read the
contents of this screen before using the
system.
Tap [Yes] to allow the Confirmation at installation screen to be displayed.
Tap [Do not display] to stop the Confirmation at installation screen from being
displayed when the system is started next time.
The Confirmation at installation screen shows safety messages in the following order.
Cautions for safety Handling caution 1 Handling caution 2 Installation precaution

Connection and Installation Place to install the Checking
installation metal detector installation state
Operation Operation Using the metal Checking

detector conveyance
Maintenance and Use in combination Products to be Checking for dust

cleaning with rejector inspected by metal
detector
End of confirmation Metal detection End of confirmation Checking belts and

performance of conveyors
metal detector
Touch panel Checking photocell 4 Maintenance

operation
End of confirmation End of confirmation
3 Tap the [Next] button to display the next message.

5 Appendix
25
4 Select the check box on the screen, and
then tap [Completed].
1 Basic Operations
5 Select the access level.

Refer to “Changing Access Level”.
 P. 27 Changing Access Level

6 Set the Date and Time.

Refer to “Setting the Date and Time”.
 P. 117 Setting the Date and Time
7 Set the rejector.

Refer to “Setting Rejector”.
 P. 148 Setting Rejector
To register a product, refer to “Registering a New Product” in Basic Operations.

 P. 30 Registering a New Product
For USB memory (option) and signal tower settings, refer to the respective sections.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
26
Basic Usage
Basic Usage
> Turning On/Off Power

To turn on the power, turn the power switch
clockwise.
1 Basic Operations
To turn off the power, turn it counterclockwise.
Power switch ON
OFF
> Changing Access Level
The access level can be changed to change the range of operation according to the level
of the operator.
This machine has 4 access levels. Level 3 is only for Anritsu service engineers and not
available for general use. The following 3 levels can be used:
Level 1a: Operator Level 1

Only basic operations such as running, stopping, and changing the product
are allowed.
Level 1b: Operator Level 2

In addition to the operations permitted by Level 1a, “Operation Check”,
“Product Registration”, and “Clear Statistics” are allowed.
Level 2: Manager Level

This level is for managers of this product. In addition to the operations
permitted by Level 1b, managers are allowed to set production conditions and
check the history data.
4 Maintenance
To set parameters, change the access level from “Operator Level” to “Manager Level”.
5 Appendix
27
Basic Usage
1 Select “Menu” screen → “Control Panel”
→ “Access Level Change” and click [Set].
The “Access Level Change” screen is
displayed.
1 Basic Operations
2 Select the Manager Level radio button and click [OK]. The password input screen is
displayed.
Select Manager Level Password input screen

3 Enter the password “7777” and tap [OK] to change the access level to Manager Level.
For instructions on changing and initializing the password, refer to “Changing or
Initializing Password”.
 P. 115 Changing and Initializing Password
When the power is turned off while in Level 2 and turned on again, the level returns to Level 1b.
When the power is turned off while in Level 1a and turned on again, the level is Level 1a.
4 Maintenance
To change the level from Level 1a to Level 1b or Level 2, or from Level 1b to Level 2, enter the
password.
The password to Level 1b is "5555".
The password to Level 2 is "7777".
The access level of each function can be set in the “Set Access Authority” screen.
 P. 172 Setting Access Level By Function
5 Appendix
28
Basic Usage
> Operating and Stopping
▪ Before starting operation, make sure that the area near the metal
Caution
1 Basic Operations
detector is safe. It is extremely dangerous to start operation while
inspecting components such as the conveyor belt and drive belt.
▪ Be careful not to get your clothes caught in the equipment.
▪ Remove all inspected products on the metal detector conveyor and
upstream conveyors before starting and running the conveyors. For
stable metal detection, metal detection is not performed for about 1
second after the [Start] key is pressed.
Also, metal detection is not performed for about 1 second after
changing the product number while the conveyors run.
▪ Before starting operation, take off any ornament. If it falls onto the
conveyor belt, it might end up as a contaminant.
▪ Avoid applying load or making an impact on the indicator. They may
be a cause of the touch screen failure.
For stable metal detecting operation, we recommend that you turn on the power at least 10

minutes before the start of production.
(The same applies when performing "Register new product." and "Auto-setting".)
Before starting the conveyors, remove products on the conveyor. If operation is started while
products are on the conveyors, inspecting and rejection may not be performed correctly.
■ Operating
Tap the [Start] button. The conveyor starts
up and becomes operational.
The area around the Start button illuminates
4 Maintenance
in green.
"Register new product." must be completed

before starting operation.
■ Stopping
Tap the [Stop] button.
The conveyor stops, and the area around
the Stop button illuminates in red.
5 Appendix
29
Basic Usage
> Registering a New Product
In this equipment, parameters of up to 200 products can be registered.
Registering products allows you to perform production control properly and operate the
1 Basic Operations
equipment effectively.
Tapping "Register new product." opens the product registration start screen. Follow the
instructions on the screen to input and set a new product.
1 Prepare a master product (a product with dimensions, weight, contents, and

packaging equivalent to those of products normally fed to the line).
2 Select the product No. to be registered.

An unregistered product No. is selected
automatically.
To change the product No., tap the

"Prod" text box, select the product No. to
be registered, and then tap [OK]. The
currently-selected product No. is
highlighted.
4 Maintenance
Tap [Next].
5 Appendix
30
Basic Usage
3 Tap the Product Name text box to display
the keyboard.
Input the product name, and tap [OK].
1 Basic Operations
Check that the product name is correctly
input, and tap [Next].

4 Input the product length.
Tap the text box to display the numeric
keypad. Input the value, and tap [Next].
The rough dimensions can be measured by

using the scale on the screen. 4 Maintenance
Input the product length.

Input the longest dimension value as the
length when the product is conveyed. (When
the product is conveyed at an angle, etc.)
5 Appendix
31
Basic Usage
5 Check that the correct value is input.
When executing a metal contamination check

1 Basic Operations
(packaged) or a missing product check,

always feed products through keeping at least
280 mm space between them.
6 To change the inspection conditions, etc.,

tap the [Detail set] button.
Item Description
Product Name Shows the name of the product.
Shows the length of the product in the conveyance
Product Length(L)
direction.
Select the method used to check the metal detector.

• Metal check (bulk)
Check method
• Metal check (packaged)
• Missing
Set this for a missing product check when "Metal check
(packaged)" is selected. When performing a missing
product check, “Yes” is set by default.
Double product evaluation
Set this when "Metal check (packaged)" is selected.
Select whether to reject products as a double product
when the products are conveyed close together.
4 Maintenance
Test piece size(Fe) Set the size of the test piece for control sensitivity.
When a test piece is fed for an evaluation and rejection
check, the size input here is displayed (*) and recorded
Test piece size(SUS)
in the history as the result.
* If this value is Φ0.0, the size is not displayed.
Main Conveyor Speed Set the conveyor speed of the metal detector.
Set whether the rejection timing (T3 and T4) is
calculated automatically.
* When the check method is Metal check (packaged),
5 Appendix
RJ timing
automatic calculation is executed by using the rejector
manufactured by Anritsu (flipper type and drop type)
connected.
32
Basic Usage
Item Description
Input the time taken until the product reaches the
T3 (Rejector delay time)
rejector.
Input the time taken for operating the rejector in the case
1 Basic Operations
T4 (Rejector operation time)
of NG.
Sets the EXNG delay time (the shift time until the metal
EXNG Delay Time
detector accepts the External NG signal).
Sets the EXNG2 delay time (the shift time until the metal
EXNG2 Delay Time
detector accepts the External NG2 signal).
Appears when the NG product process (operation)
NG product parameter is the product parameter.
Set it to "NG stop" in case of NG.
After checking the input items, tap [Back] to return to the screen displayed in step 5.
Tap [Next].
7 Select the auto-set method.

Normally, select Full-auto (recommended)
and press [Next].

▪ Full automatic method
This method evaluates the properties
of the product and adjusts the check
settings to optimal values
automatically to fit these properties.
▪ Specifies scan mode

This is used for setting a product for
which auto setting was performed and
whose properties are already known. 4 Maintenance
 P. 175 Registering Products Using Other Auto Setting Methods

5 Appendix
33
Basic Usage
8 Check the back and forth movements of
the conveyor.
▪ Yes
1 Basic Operations
To automatically move the master

product back and forth on the conveyor
when performing the auto-set.
▪ No
To allow an operator to feed the master
product when performing the Auto-Set.
Note that it is not appropriate to automatically move products back and forth under
the conditions described below.
▪ A product whose height is 10 mm or less and that does not block the photocell
▪ A product whose gravity center is high and is unstable
▪ A product of a shape prone to falling over
▪ A long product that could drop from the edge of the conveyor
▪ A product prone to changing its orientation when moved back and forth
(for example, a slippery product)
9 Execute auto-setting.
Auto-setting automatically adjusts the
inspection and evaluation conditions so
that optimal inspection is executed
according to the product characteristics.
Prepare the master product and tap the

[Start] button. When the conveyor starts
4 Maintenance
running, follow the instructions on the

screen to feed the master product.
• Do not feed the master product while the

message [Wait for a while] is displayed.
• Setup can be stopped by tapping the [Back]
or [Stop] button during auto-setting. If setup
is stopped, the previous setting values
remain without being updated.
5 Appendix
• If a device error occurs during auto-setting,

setup is stopped. In this case, clear the error,
and restart auto-setting.
34
Basic Usage
▼ Metal contamination check
Feed the master product as many times

as instructed on the screen.
1 Basic Operations
The auto-setting result is displayed.
When auto-setting is finished, the

determined sensitivity mode and
estimated detection sensitivity are
displayed.
If a product longer than the specified

product length is fed, the product length
is automatically changed.
The estimated detection sensitivity value is a guide to the kind of test piece that can be
detected. This is not a guaranteed value. Be sure to check the detection sensitivity after

completing auto-setting.
▪ Tap [Completed] to complete product

registration.
▪ By tapping [Details], a list of the

estimated detection sensitivity for each
sensitivity mode is displayed.
When the sensitivity mode determined by

auto-setting is either [A-A] or [B-B], the 4 Maintenance
sensitivity may be improved by changing
the mode from [A-A] to[B-B] or [B-B] to
[A-A] respectively, depending on products
to be inspected. When the sensitivity
mode is changed, select the mode to set
then tap Change to start the final
adjustment again by feeding the product.
The setting market by ★ is the highest in detection sensitivity. The sensitivity value in
5 Appendix
parenthesis may change when auto-setting is conducted again.
35
Basic Usage
▼ Checking for a missing product
When executing a missing product check, always feed products through keeping at least 280
mm space between them. For stable metal detection, we recommend that you turn on the
1 Basic Operations
power at least 10 minutes before the start of auto-setting.
Feed the master product 7 times and

missing product (NG sample products) 3
times (for the Full-auto method).
When Auto-set finishes, the determined

sensitivity mode and the stability index
are displayed.
The less the stability index, the more a

missing product can be detected with
stability.
4 Maintenance
Adjust the detection sensitivity if the

stability index is 0.5 or more.
 P. 183 Changing the detection sensitivity

(for a missing product check)
5 Appendix
36
Basic Usage
Tapping [Details] displays a “★” mark on
the line of the sensitivity mode
determined by auto-setting. To change
the mode, select another mode, tap
1 Basic Operations
[Change], and then tap [Completed] to
finalize the change.
Tap [Completed] to complete product registration.
Cautions on auto-setting
(1) Contaminants in the master product are not detected during auto-setting. Therefore, be
careful not to let the piece pass to the downstream equipment. When selecting a rejector
manufactured by Anritsu, the product is rejected in the direction set as "Forced" in "RJ
direction settings". Take extreme care if the rejector is waiting in the OK direction since air
jet and pusher type rejectors cannot control the rejection direction.
(2) Be careful not to use an incorrect product during auto-setting. If an incorrect product is
used, inspection may not be performed correctly and a contaminated product may pass.
(3) Do not feed a product heavier than prescribed in the specifications of this device. This
may cause motor failure or burn injuries since the amount of heat generated by the motor

increases.
(4) Do not feed a product larger than the detector head opening. This may cause the plastic
cover of the detector head to crack or become damaged when the product hits the cover.
(5) Feed the master product in the same direction and position as normal products.
(6) If the master product does not block the photocell optical axis, block the optical axis with
your hand when the master product approaches the detector head. Additionally, do not
use the conveyor back and forth function.
(7) Even for the same products, the detection conditions may vary every time auto-setting is
performed due to external noise, etc.
(8) If the characteristics differ between the master product and the actually fed products or if
the feeding directions are not the same, the actually fed products may be detected
incorrectly.
4 Maintenance
(9) Operation for a product for which Auto setting is not completed cannot start.
(10) During auto-setting, a photocell error occurs after the photocell monitoring time has
elapsed, even for bulk type products.
(11) For Auto-setting, the number of feeding products may increase in accordance with the
product characteristics.
Metal detection level bar
5 Appendix
37
Basic Usage
After "Register new product." is completed, the settings of the registered product type
can be verified.
 P. 68 Adjusting the RJ timing


1 Basic Operations
P. 180 Changing the Metal Detection Sensitivity

 P. 39 Checking Operations
Product registration is now complete.
If the settings are not correct, start again from step 1 or change the item in question by
using the "Adjust registered products" function.
 P. 40 Adjusting Registered Products
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
38
Basic Usage
> Checking Operations
Operation Check is a function to check if the equipment is operating correctly.
By making sure that the equipment is operating normally at the beginning and end of
1 Basic Operations
production of a day, or at the beginning and end of a lot, operational reliability can be
guaranteed indirectly.
“Eval./RJ Confirmation*” is a function to check for the correct evaluation and rejection of
products.
* This can be performed when the check method is "Metal check (packaged)". If "Metal
check (bulk)" is selected, check this in "Check Mode".
 P. 174 Using Check Mode
Smart Guide can also be used to check operations during the daily operations procedure.
 P. 155 Using Smart Guide
Tap "Ope.Check" on the "Menu" screen to

display "Operation Check" screen. The
displayed menu item varies depending on
the settings of the operation access authority
for the operation check.

Select “Common set for Ope. Check” and check the conditions specified.
For the settings at the end of an operation check, see the following table.
Setting
Name Description
(Default:_)
Fix Route Eva/RJ check is performed when the operator feeds
Eva/RJ Check
* Read only products according to on-screen instructions.
This sets on or off for the function that automatically saves
4 Maintenance
Store at end of No the operation check results to USB memory at the end of
operation check Yes an operation check.
* Only when the USB memory option is used.
5 Appendix
39
Basic Usage
Select [Eval./RJ Check Settings] to set and check the conditions. See the following table
for details.
Setting
Name Description
1 Basic Operations
(Default:_)
Eval./RJ Sample 2 to 10 Set the number of sample products used for an
Count (Initial value: 3) evaluation/rejection check.
Set the size of the Fe test piece used in the pattern method
Test Piece Size φ0.0
for the operation check. When this value is φ0.0, the test
(Fe) (φ0.0 to 20.0)
piece size is not displayed on the screen.
Set the size of the SUS test piece used in the pattern
method for the operation check. When this value is φ0.0,
(SUS) (φ0.0 to 20.0)
the test piece size is not displayed on the screen.

Set the size of the non-Fe test piece used in the pattern
method for the operation check. When this value is φ0.0,
(Non-Fe) (φ0.0 to 20.0)
the test piece size is not displayed on the screen.
Set the evaluation reference of sample products used for
OK
evaluation/rejection check.
Eval. Ref. MDNG
Set this parameter for the number of times (3 to 10) to
EXNG
perform an operation check per product.
Set the type of sample test piece used for
Fe
evaluation/rejection check.
Test Piece Type SUS
Set this parameter for the number of times (3 to 10) to
Non-Fe
perform an operation check per product.
> Adjusting Registered Products

This is the procedure for modifying the
specified conditions for registered products.
Detailed information omitted in the Product
Registration Navi can also be entered.
4 Maintenance
Select the “Menu” screen → “Adjust

registered products” → “Product settings”.
The screen shown on the right is displayed.
Set and adjust each item by referring to the tables below.

5 Appendix
40
Basic Usage
■ Product information
(Adjust registered products → Product settings → Product information)
Setting
Name Description
1 Basic Operations
(Default:_)
Sets the product name. This is the same as Disp
Type1 in the “Enter Product Information” screen.
(Max. 28 characters
Product name To register both Product name and Product name2,
in alphabet)
you can change the display of them.
Sets the product name. This is the same as Disp
Type2 in the “Enter Product Information” screen.
Product name 2 (Max. 28 characters)
This is available in blank.
Sets the Lot No.. The Lot No. is displayed in the
Lot No. (Max. 10 characters)
“Statis” screen.
Product Length Sets the maximum length of the product.
Product Length
Displays the value set for the product.
(L)
Product Width

(W)
Product Height
(H)
This is the parameter to recognize the product. To
register the part of the product bar code (5 to 12
Item code 0 to 999999999999
digits), changing the product is available.
When this is set 0, this parameter is unregistered.
■ Ins. condition set

(Adjust registered products → Product settings → Ins. condition settings) 4 Maintenance
Setting
Name Description
(Default:_)
Test Piece Size φ0.0 Sets the test piece size Fe. When this value is φ0.0, the
(Fe) (φ0.0 to 20.0) test piece size is not displayed on the screen.
Test Piece Size φ0.0 Sets the test piece size SUS. When this value is φ0.0,
(SUS) (φ0.0 to 20.0) the test piece size is not displayed on the screen.
Test Piece Size φ0.0 Sets the test piece size SUS. When this value is φ0.0,
(Non-Fe) (φ0.0 to 20.0) the test piece size is not displayed on the screen.
5 Appendix
41
Basic Usage
Setting
Name Description
(Default:_)
Indicates what type of the inspection is being performed
based on the results of product registration.
1 Basic Operations
Metal 1 Metal 1
Checks fed products for each metal and
(Packaged)
Metal 2 evaluates NG when either of them is
Metal 2 to 4
Metal 3 evaluated as NG.
Evaluation mode (Bulk Type)
Metal 4
Evaluates the product as OK when metal
Missing
component in it exceeds evaluation limit.
* Read only
Missing Evaluates the product as NG when metal
component in it is lower than evaluation
limit.
Set whether to perform the “Double Product Evaluation”.
Double product This item is set to “Yes” when checking a missing product
No/Yes/ALL
evaluation and you cannot change this setting. When ALL is set,
double-OK products are rejected as Double Product.
This is the check method being used for the currently
selected product.
If a product is evaluated as NG in a metal
evaluation, the product being fed is
evaluated as NG.
Metal check Set this when the interval between fed
(bulk) products is 280 mm or less, when the
product cannot block the photocell since
it is too thin, or when inspecting smaller
products such as candies.
Metal check If a product is evaluated as NG in a metal
(bulk) evaluation, the product being fed is
Check method Metal check evaluated as NG.
(packaged) Metal check Set this when the interval between fed
Missing (packaged) products is 280 mm or more, when the
4 Maintenance
products interrupt the photocell, and

when the products are rejected
individually.
Checks if accessories made of metal (or
coated with aluminum-evaporated
products) are missing. Set this when the
Missing interval between fed products is 280 mm
or more, when the products interrupt the
photocell, and when the products are
rejected individually.
5 Appendix
42
Basic Usage
■ Set conveyor speed (option)
Set main conveyor speed
(Adjust registered products → Product settings → conveyor speed → Set main
conveyor speed)
1 Basic Operations
Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
Main Conveyor 39
Sets the conveyor speed of metal detector.
Speed (5 to 91 m/min)
RJ conveyor spd. Settings

(Adjust registered products → Product settings → conveyor speed → RJ conveyor spd.
settings)
Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
RJ Conveyor 39
Sets the conveyor speed of the rejector.
Speed (5 to 120 m/min)
■ Measurement timing

Measurement timing set
(Adjust registered products → Product settings → Measurement timing → Measurement
timing set)
Setting
Name Description
(Default:_)
Sets the EXNG delay time (the shift time until the metal
1 detector accepts the External NG signal). This is set
EXNG Delay Time
(0 to 9999) ms when conveyor speed by product and I/O input: EXNG
signal are used together. 4 Maintenance
Sets the EXNG2 delay time (the shift time until the metal
EXNG2 Delay 1 detector accepts the External NG2 signal). This is set
Time (0 to 9999) ms when conveyor speed by product and I/O input: EXNG2
signal are used together.
5 Appendix
43
Basic Usage
■ RJ timing
RJ timing settings
(Adjust registered products → Product settings → RJ timing → RJ timing settings)
1 Basic Operations
Setting
Name Description
(Default:_)
T3
Sets the rejector delay time (from the end of evaluation to
(Rejection delay (1 to 9999) ms
the start of rejector operation).
time)
T4
Sets the RJ operation time (from start to end of RJ
(RJ operation (45 to 9999) ms
operation).
time)
This parameter is automatically set according to the

Auto specified RJ model type. When this is set to “Auto”, T3
RJ Timig
Manual and T4 are automatically set by inputting the RJ
Conveyor Speed.
specified RJ model type.
Pulses
RJ Output Type*1 Pulses The RJ output is kept for T4 time.
Hold
The current RJ output is kept until the next
Hold
RJ output.
NG product Does not stop the conveyor when NG

Nonstop Nonstop
process product occurs.
Stop
(by prod.)*2 Stop Stop the conveyor when NG product occurs.
Set the rejection operation when T4 of the next product
overlaps during T4 (rejection hold time). Set this item
when using a rejector that has a low rejecting
performance such as a shuttle rejector.
Performs the rejection operation after T3
Evaluate
Rejection output Evaluate Priority (Rejection delay time) according to the latest
Priority
control*3 NG Priority evaluation result.
4 Maintenance
Extends the rejection operation in the NG

direction when the first product is evaluated
NG
as NG and the next product is evaluated as
Priority
OK. The operation is extended for T4 of the
next product.
*1 The default of RJ Output Type depends on the type of Rejector.
*2 “NG product process” is displayed when “NG product process (operation)” is set to
“by prod.”.
*3 This parameter is invalid and hidden when RJ Shift by Rank is enabled, when the
5 Appendix
rejection output type is set to "Hold” or when the product is “Bulk Type”.
44
Basic Usage
■ Detection sensitivity
Adjust detection sensitivity
(Adjust registered products → Product settings → Det. Sens. → Detection sens. settings)
1 Basic Operations
Setting
Name Description
(Default:_)
Eval. Limit
Magnification*
(ML1)
Eval. Limit This parameter sets the evaluation limit magnification that
Magnification* is automatically set when the auto setting of the metal
(ML2) 5.0 contamination check finishes.
Eval. Limit (0.1 to 19.0) The estimated detection sensitivity displayed after auto
Magnification* setting is the value for the evaluation limit magnification set
(ML3) by this parameter.
Eval. Limit
Magnification*
(ML4)
Eval. Limit This parameter sets the evaluation limit magnification
Magnification automatically specified when the auto setting for the
(Fe) 5.0 missing product check finishes. The estimated detection

Eval. Limit (0.1 to 19.0) sensitivity displayed after the auto setting finishes is also
Magnification the value related to the evaluation limit magnification set by
(SUS) this parameter.
* Read only This is the value of the estimated detection sensitivity (Fe)
Est. Sens (Fe)
displayed after auto setting.
* Read only This is the value of the estimated detection sensitivity
Est. Sens (SUS)
(SUS) displayed after auto setting.
* The evaluation limit magnification value is set to 3.5 after auto setting, depending on
the product type.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
45
Basic Usage
■ Test piece control sensitivity
(Adjust registered products → Product settings → Set test piece ctl sense)
Setting
Name Description
1 Basic Operations
(Default:_)
Sets the size of the Fe test piece for control sensitivity
(values indicating the size of the test piece to be
referenced for detection).
The specified test piece size appears on the screen
(Fe) (φ0.0 to 20.0)
during evaluation and RJ check.
The test piece size is not displayed on the screen if
this value is φ0.0.
Sets the size of the SUS test piece for control

sensitivity (values indicating the size of the test piece
to be referenced for detection).
(SUS) (φ0.0 to 20.0)
The test piece size is not displayed on the screen
when this value is φ0.0.
Sets the size of the Non-Fe test piece for control
sensitivity (values indicating the size of the test piece
to be referenced for detection).

Appears when "Test Piece Type" on the "Evaluation &
Rejector Check Settings" screen is "Non-Fe".
(Non-Fe) (φ0.0 to 20.0)
The test piece size is not displayed on the screen if
this value is φ0.0.
■ Conveyor mode
(Adjust registered products → Product settings → Conveyor Mode)
4 Maintenance
Setting
Name Description
(Default:_)
MD Conveyor No Sets when use the conveyor without metal
Mode Yes contamination detection.
 P. 169 Using Conveyor Mode

5 Appendix
46
Basic Usage
■ Product check
(Adjust registered products → Product settings → Product check)
Setting
Name Description
1 Basic Operations
(Default:_)
Set whether to perform a product check.
No Does not perform a product check.
Performs a product check when the conveyor
starts running first after the power is turned on
No Standard or the product is changed. Note that a product
Default Phase
Standard check is not performed when the product is
Correction
Each changed while the conveyor is running.
Always performs a product check when the
conveyor starts running.
Each
* This setting cannot be specified when a
smart guide is being used.
Default Phase Set the allowable range of the phase shifting when multiple
0.5°
Correction master products are fed through during a product check.
(0.1 to 10.0°)
Range Increasing the value reduces the accuracy.
Default Phase
1 Set the number of master products fed through during a
Correction

(1 to 5) product check. Increasing the value stabilizes checking.
Count
Set the range of the phase shifting of master products fed
Default Phase 6.0°
through during a product check.
Correction Limit (0.1 to 10.0°)
Increasing the value reduces the accuracy.
Prod. Detection
level (ML1)
Set the tracking level in a product check for bulk settings.
Prod. Detection The set value is a multiple of the product effect value
level (ML2) 0.80 (Imax) for auto-settings.
Prod. Detection (0.01 to 1.00) * If a product check does not finish even after a product
level (ML3) has been fed through, specify a smaller value for this
4 Maintenance
setting.
Prod. Detection
level (ML4)
 P. 178 Correcting the Phase based on Characteristic Change (Product check function)
■ FOCUS setting details

(Adjust registered products → Product settings → FOCUS setting details)
Setting
Name Description
(Default:_)
5 Appendix
Hi freq. : FSNo.2 * Read only This is the optimum processing method determined based
Lo freq. : FSNo.2 on the result of the FOCUS setting.
47
Basic Usage
■ Tracking conditions
(Adjust registered products → Product settings → Tracking conditions)
Setting
Name Description
1 Basic Operations
(Default:_)
This parameter sets parameters related to auto tracking from
the characteristics during the production.
When measuring a product that requires auto-tracking
OFF
function, the auto-tracking function is automatically enabled
Standard according to the auto-setting. But if the status of the product
Temp Chg1 changes rapidly, the auto-tracking function might not be
Temp Chg2 enabled with the parameters set by the auto-setting. To
Tracking Type
Temp Chg3 prevent this problem from occurring, this parameter can be
Var-1 used to set the tracking parameter for supporting rapid

Var-2 changes. The settings Temp Chg1 to Temp Chg3 and Var-1
to Var-3 can be set after the auto-setting is performed without
Var-3
a need of performing the auto-setting again.
It is also possible to disable the auto-tracking function
forcibly.
Auto-tracking function is automatically set based on the results of auto-setting.

Setting the auto-tracking function requires special knowledge. Ask Anritsu or its distributor for
service to perform the setting.
■ Full detection
(Adjust registered products → Product settings → Full Detection)
Setting
Name Description
(Default:_)
This is used for detecting when the rejected-products
0
BoxFull Qty. box is full. This sets the permissible count from when full
(0 to 9999)
is detected until the conveyor is stopped.
4 Maintenance
 P. 129 Full detection

5 Appendix
48
Basic Usage
■ RJ operation adjustment
(Adjust registered products → RJ operation adjustment → RJ Parameter list)
Setting
Name Description
1 Basic Operations
(Default:_)
T3
Sets the rejector delay time (from the end of evaluation
(Rejection delay (1 to 9999) ms
to the start of rejector operation).
time)
T4
Sets the RJ operation time (from start to end of RJ
(RJ operation (45 to 9999) ms
operation).
time)
specified RJ model type.
Pulses
RJ Output Type*1 Pulses The RJ output is kept for T4 time.
Hold
The current RJ output is kept until the next
Hold
RJ output.
*1 The default of RJ Output Type depends on the type of Rejector.
■ Auto-set
(Adjust registered products → Auto-set)

Readjust the sensitivity setting if the sensitivity decreases due to a change in product
properties such as temperature, water content, and shape, which causes a false
detection.
 P. 65 Auto-setting again (Readjusting registered products)
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
49
Basic Usage
> Handling Errors and Alarms
When the equipment detects any abnormality, an error or alarm message is displayed on
the screen.
1 Basic Operations
The date and time when the error occurred, model name, serial number, and a detailed
description of an error appears automatically, and tapping the [Help] button while
an alarm message is displayed makes a detailed description appear. When [Help] is
tapped while the detailed alarm message is being displayed, the operation history related
to the events currently causing the error or alarm is displayed. If there are multiple
possible measures, they can be viewed sequentially by tapping the [Others] button. When
the buzzer alarm is enabled ( P. 135 Setting Signal Tower and Buzzer (option)), it can
be stopped by tapping the [No sound] button.

Check the description and act according to the description. Tap the [Close] button and tap
the Reset button to cancel the display.
Operations cannot continue until the system recovers the error.
Operation can continue even when an alarm message is displayed. The equipment can
be stopped when an alarm is displayed by the parameter settings. Perform settings
according to the production line.
If the “Contact your dealer's customer support center” message is displayed, contact
your dealer and report the status when the error occurred, "Error No.", "Model", and
"SN".
Reset button
4 Maintenance
An example of alarm display An example of alarm display in detail

5 Appendix
50
Basic Usage
■ Checking the error or alarm occurrence status
The types and numbers of errors or alarms that have occurred are listed.
This function is used for a daily check of the production status of device status during or
1 Basic Operations
after production.
Note that you may be asked to describe the message displayed on the screen when
making a customer support inquiry.
1 Select [?] → [Alarm occurrence status].

Tap [Latest date] or [Counts] to sort the
list in the order of date or number of
occurrences.
2 Select one of the errors or alarms and tap

[Date/Time] to narrow down the list
based on the event that triggered the

selected error or alarm and display the
operation history. A list of the occurrence
dates can also be checked.
Tap [Expanded] to cancel the

narrowed-down display and return to the
normal operation history display.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
51
Basic Usage
> If NG frequently occurs
If the metal detector frequently detects metal incorrectly, you can check what might be
causing the incorrect detection by following the guidance.
1 Basic Operations
1 Select [?] → [If NG frequently occurs...].

2 Tap [Next].
Note that if your access level is
Administrator Level or higher and you tap
[Environment Diagnosis], you can launch
a function to narrow down the cause of
the incorrect detections. ( P.53
Investigating the cause of incorrect
detections).
3 Check the device or product status

according to the descriptions on the
screen.
Tap [Next].
Note that if your access level is

4 Maintenance
Administrator Level or higher and you tap

[Frequency change], you can launch the
function to change the device settings
depending on the surrounding
environment on the screen.
4 Tap [Next] to check the contents

sequentially.
5 Appendix
5 Tap [Completed].
52
Basic Usage
> Investigating the cause of incorrect detections
If the metal detector frequently detects metal incorrectly, the cause of the incorrect
detections can be narrowed down.
1 Basic Operations
1 Select [?] → [If NG frequently occurs...] ,
and then tap [Environment Diagnosis]. To
perform this operation, your access level
must be Administrator Level or higher.
2 Tap [Next].
This function automatically controls the
operation (on/off) of the conveyor. Do not
perform this operation during production
or while products remain on the
conveyor.

3 Check the status of the metal detector. It
takes about two minutes for the result to
be displayed.
If you tap [Cancel], the inspection will be
canceled and the conveyor will stop if it is
operating.
4 Maintenance
4 Display the inspection results.

Tap [Details] to confirm the possible
causes.
If the problem persists or occurs again
later, contact your customer support.
5 Appendix
53
Basic Usage
5 Tap [Next].
By saving the data here, you can output
the inspection results if requested.

1 Basic Operations
P. 238 Outputting support data

(only when the USB memory option is
used)
6 Tap [Completed].
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
54
Basic Usage
List of inspection results
SN-00 There is no anomaly on Metal detector operation.

No anomalies If false detection occurs, consider following causes.
1 Basic Operations
▪ Product characteristics such as temperature, moisture, sodium
contents and shape is changing.
▪ Product flow is not stable.
▪ Operation is unstable due to deterioration or machine failure.
If problem persists, Call Anritsu or its distributor for service.
SN-02 Sharing same power source between MD and other peripheral devices
Noise from such as packaging or filling machine can generate influential noise and
power source could cause false detection.
or other Separate the power source or change one plug to different nearby
devices outlet.
False detection may occur by electromagnetic noise generated from a
device with an inverter.
Change carrier frequency of an inverter by following the device
operation manual.
Peripheral MD may affect and cause false detection.
Need to arrange peripheral devices around or change frequency.

Call Anritsu or its distributor for service.
Operation may be unstable due to electrical fault or aged deterioration.
SN-03 False detection may occur due to vibration from the floor or peripheral
Noise from devices.
vibration or ▪ Ensure to lock legs of frame.
moving metal ▪ Leave little gap between adjacent conveyor and main conveyor.
False detection may occur due to metal objects such as metal door/gate
creating influential noise by opening and closing motion. 4 Maintenance
Take measure to keep the objects away. If it does not solve a problem,
5 Appendix
55
Basic Usage
SN-04 False detection may occur due to filthy conveyor belt.
Noise from Clean the conveyor belt. There may be residue left on the belt.
conveyor ( P. 213 Cleaning)
movement Any fray or scratch found, the belt should be replaced.
1 Basic Operations
( P. 223 Replacing the Conveyor Belt)

When conveyor belt has any contact to MD aperture, it would lead to
possible false detection.
Ensure to keep the conveyor belt not to come in contact with MD
aperture.
( P. 225 Adjusting Belt Alignment)
Roller deformation faulty motor would generate influential noise and
cause false detection.

Check any abnormality on exterior of conveyor unit. Call Anritsu or its
distributor for service.
* Noise can easily occur if the piece can be detected with sufficient margin, increase the
evaluation limit magnification value or perform auto-setting again.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
56
Daily Operation Procedure
Daily Operation Procedure
Warning (1) In an emergency, cut the power to the metal Turn leftwards
ON
detector by turning the power switch leftward
OFF
1 Basic Operations
Power switch
If the optional Emergency Stop Switch is Press to stop CW
fitted, press it first to stop the metal detector in an emergency
in an emergency.
An alarm message (A361) is displayed on the
screen.
Releasing Emergency Stop Switch and recovery Release lock
method
(a) Release Emergency Stop Switch
Turn the head of the switch in the marked
direction.
(b) Use the Reset button to reset the alarm.
Tap the Reset // button displayed on the
screen.
(c) Tap the Stop button to stop the metal
detector.
Address the cause of the emergency stop,
remove the product on the metal detector

conveyors and rejector, and restart
operations.
(2) For safety, NEVER touch any moving part during operation.
(3) For safety, NEVER operate the metal detector when it is partly
disassembled.
(4) For safety, ALWAYS confirm that the operator is not touching any
moving part before starting the metal detector by remote control.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
57
This chapter describes the operations according to the purpose.
Screen Hierarchy 59
Viewing Inspection Data 62
Adjusting Equipment 65
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data 69
Other Settings and Adjustments 114
Options and Peripheral Devices 135
Other Useful Functions 155
58
Screen Hierarchy
Screen Hierarchy
The screen system of this metal detector is as follows.
Basic display Register new product

Switch the product.
Adjust registered products Product settings *1
1 Basic Operations
Register new product.
RJ operation adjustment *2
Check sensitivity. Check Mode Auto-set
Adjust sensitivity. FOCUS setting
Display product list
Menu Control Panel Access Level Change

Change user **
Password Change
Display settings
Date Setting
Key touch operation
Access level change Select User **
Date setting
? (Help)
Regional and Language
Version Information
Master information **
Home display settings *3
Others
Operation Check Evaluation/RJ Confirmation
Clear Stats. Check Mode
Eva/RJ Confirmation Common set for Ope. check
Evaluation & RJ check settings
Stats Control Basic Statistics Setting

Clear Statistics
History Operation History

Parameter History
NG History
Alarm History
Operation Check History
USB memory/ Save to USB memory

Printer (option)
Output to printer
Load USB memory
Set USB memory store
Printer output settings
Saving data for service tech.
4 Maintenance
Language
Maintenance and setting Installation check *4

Unit/connected device set *5
Functions *6
Security and Rules *7
Unit monitoring *8
** Not available Device Information *9
Maintenance Information *10
5 Appendix
59
Screen Hierarchy
*1 Product information
Product settings
Inspection condition set
Conveyor speed Set main conveyor speed

1 Basic Operations
RJ conveyor speed settings
Measurement timing Measurement timing setting
RJ Timing Adjust RJ timing

RJ Timing Setting
Detection Sensitivity Sensitivity Adjustment

Sensitivity Adjustment 2
Detection sensitivity settings
Set testpiece ctl sense

Conveyor Mode
Product Check Setting
FOCUS setting details
Tracking conditions
Full detection
*2
RJ operation adjustment Adjust RJ timing
RJ Parameter list *7
Security and rules Set Access Authority
*3
Home display settings Home screen disp. sel. Password Change
Ope. Check menu sel. User management settings**
Prod. Control menu sel. Prod. management settings**
Set/Adj menu sel. Policy setting list
Other operation menu Common/By product

selection Default value at the product
*4 registration
Installation check Confirmation at installation

Set RJ direction
*8
Register new product. Unit monitoring Product effect monitor
MD Head Inspection Noise monitor
Installation check setting IO timing adjustment
Cautions for handling
4 Maintenance
Noise avoidance setting *9

Device Information Version Information
*6
Device Information settings
Functions Photocell monitoring
Smart Guide settings
Full detection *10
Maintenance
Product check User Information
Information
Prod. management settings**
** Not available
5 Appendix
60
Screen Hierarchy
*5
Unit/connected device
set Conveyor Set main conveyor
RJ conveyor settings
1 Basic Operations
Rejector Common set of RJ
RJ direction settings
I/O output settings
IO timing adjustment
Signal tower / Buzzer Signal tower common

(option)
settings
Signal tower settings
I/O output settings
Printer (option)
Printer setting
USB Memory Set USB Memory store
General I/O connection I/O input settings

I/O output settings
IO input setting (Details)
IO output setting (Details)
Extension I/O connection
setting

Serial connection (option) Serial1 settings
Serial2(A) settings
Serial3(B) settings
Network connection Network Common settings

(option)
Communication content
settings
Time synchronization settings
NTP time acquisition
Network status
Version upgrade
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
61
Viewing Inspection Data
> Basic display

Press the [Home] button to display the
"Basic display" screen.
1 Basic Operations
(The number to be selected varies

depending on "Smart Guide setting" or the
"Home screen disp. Sel." setting.)
Regularly used menus and products as well
as statistics are displayed on the "Basic
display" screen.
Item Description
Switch the
Switches the product.
product.
Register new
Moves to the navigation screen for registering new products.
product.
Moves to the "Check Mode" screen where you can check the detection
Check sensitivity.
sensitivity.
Moves to the screen for adjustment if OK products are evaluated as NG or if
Adjust sensitivity.
test pieces cannot be detected.
Prod Shows the current product No. and product name.

Shows the total number of products (total number of OK and NG products)
and number of NG products (products other than OK products).
Statistics
Tap this area to move to the Statis screen. The counting method varies
depending on whether the product is a bulk type or package type.
For the metal detection level bar and evaluation icons, refer to "Description of Operation
Screen" on page 13.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
62
> Statistics
Tap the [Statistics] area on the "Basic
display" screen to open the "Statis" screen.
1 Basic Operations
(This screen can also be displayed by
specifying a "Home screen disp. sel."
setting.)
In the left side of the screen, the total count
and OK, NG products, and double product
count and percentages (%) are displayed.
Also in the right side of the screen, Lot No.
and start time are displayed.
Item Description
Current total count of all products since statistics last cleared. This is not
Total
counted for bulk type products.
Current total count and percentage of all OK products since statistics last
OK
cleared. This is not counted for bulk type products.
Current total count and percentage of all MDNG products since statistics last
MDNG cleared. The products for which an A605 Evaluation timing alarm (when

“NG” is selected for “Evaluation timing alarm”) occurs are also counted.
Current total count and percentage of all double products since statistics last
cleared. The products for which an A605 Evaluation timing alarm (when
D-Prod.
“D-Prod.” is selected for “Evaluation timing alarm”) occurs are also counted.
This is not counted for bulk type products.
Current total count and percentage of all external NG products since
EXNG＊
statistics last cleared.
EXNG2＊ Same as EXNG. Use this when multiple external NG inputs are used.
Lot No. Lot number of the current product
Indicates the start time (time when production started after statistics last
St. Time cleared).
4 Maintenance
(Year/Month/Day Hour:Minute:Second)
See “Statistics Control” (P. 122) for details about satatistics setting.
* Appears when specified in the I/O input settings.

 P. 84 Setting External I/O Signals
5 Appendix
63
> General
From the "Menu" screen, select "Control
Panel" → "Home display settings" → "Home
1 Basic Operations
screen disp. sel." → "General" to display the

"General" screen as the home screen.
The total number of inspected products and
number of NG products are displayed on the
"General" screen.
Item Description
Displays the total count including OK and NG products. This is not counted
Total
for bulk type products.
NG Displays the number of products other than OK.
Detection limit Displays the value of detection limit.
See “Description of Operation screen” (P. 13) for details about the metal detecting level
bar and the icon, “Changing the Metal Detection Sensitivity” (P. 180) for details about
detection limit.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
64
Adjusting Equipment
Adjusting Equipment
> Auto-setting again (Readjusting registered products)

Readjust the sensitivity setting if the sensitivity decreases due to a change in product
properties such as temperature, water content, and shape, which causes a false
1 Basic Operations
detection.
 Use a master product that has the property (temperature, water content and shape) after the
change.
 The FOCUS setting can be adjusted when performing the auto setting again for the product
for which the FOCUS setting is effective.
1 Tap [Adjust sensitivity.] while operation is
stopped to move to the "Sensitivity
Adjustment 2" screen, and select
[Auto-set].
2 Prepare a master product and press

[Next].
3 Select [Make auto setting by using current

settings] and then press [Next]. 4 Maintenance
Selecting [Make auto setting newly] allows

you to start performing the settings from the
initial state in the same way as when
registering a new product.
 P. 33 Registering a new product – step 7
5 Appendix
65
Adjusting Equipment
4 Select whether to move the master
product back and forth for auto setting,
and then press [Next].

1 Basic Operations
P. 34 Registering a New Product - Step 9
5 Press the [Start] button. When the

conveyor starts running, follow the
instructions on the screen to feed the
master product.
 P. 34 Registering a New Product - Step 8

Feed the master product once.
When auto-setting is finished, the

determined sensitivity mode and
estimated detection sensitivity are
displayed. Tap [Completed] to apply the
new settings.
4 Maintenance
If you do not want to apply the

auto-setting results, press [Cancel].
The estimated detection sensitivity value is a

rough indication of the size of the test piece
that can be detected and not a guaranteed
value. Be sure to check the detection
sensitivity after completing auto-setting.
5 Appendix
66
Adjusting Equipment
▼ Missing product check
Feed through the master product once
and a missing product (NG sample
product) once.
1 Basic Operations
When the auto setting finishes, the
determined sensitivity mode and the
stability index are displayed. Press
[Completed] to apply the new settings.

Press [Cancel] if you do not want to apply
the auto setting results.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
67
Adjusting Equipment
> Adjusting the RJ timing
The RJ timing can be adjusted by feeding through a product and checking the evaluation
result. From the "Menu" screen, select "Adjust registered products." → "RJ operation
1 Basic Operations
adjustment" → "Adjust RJ timing" to perform this.
Tap the [Reset timing] button to automatically set T3 and T4.
This does not appear for bulk type products.
This feature is available for flipper and dropout

rejectors only.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
68
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
> Saving Data to the USB Memory (option)

The following information can be saved to the USB memory installed to the metal
detector.
1 Basic Operations
■ Statistics (total statistics)
■ Individual
■ History (Operation History, Parameter History, NG History, Alarm History, Operation
Check History)
■ Parameters set to the metal detector (product parameters, common parameters)
■ Support data (used when a trouble occurs in the metal detector)
The data recorded to the USB memory is in the CSV format and can be edited easily by
using any spreadsheet application such as Microsoft Excel (except for information for
restoration after a failure).
The specifications regarding USB memory are as shown below.
Item Description
Max Speed Individual output 600 products/min
Individual Output is Standard: Approx. 30 million records
Maximum number of records

* Calculated for 2 GB USB memory
File system FAT16/FAT32
File name, folder name Up to 255 characters
USB memory maximum capacity USB memory of up to 2 GB can be used.
Data retention period: >10 years
Recommended USB memory Rewrite count: >2,000,000 times
Supported OS: Windows 7/8/10/Vista/XP/2000/Me
The number of days to save data in the USB memory for the production volume per day
is shown below.
4 Maintenance
Production volume/day 10,000 50,000 100,000 200,000 500,000

Standard 8.2 years 1.6 years 300 days 150 days 60 days
After removing USB memory, make sure to close the cap.

Warning Otherwise, foreign objects or water may enter during cleaning or
other circumstance and resulting in malfunction. The USB cap is
flip-top to prevent the terminal socket from being exposed.
5 Appendix
69
(1) When using USB memory

Do not save any data other than files created by the metal detector.
If files created in a PC are saved to the USB memory, the files may be identified
1 Basic Operations
falsely, and data may be destroyed. This may also result in losing the metal
detector’s ability to record data.
(2) Inserting and removing USB memory
USB memory can be inserted or removed while the power is ON. After completing
the removal command, remove the USB making sure that the writing indication
LED has turned off. If the USB memory is removed while the LED is still blinking (or
if power is suddenly turned off while the LED is still blinking), it may result in
destroying the data and the data may become unreadable. After removing USB
memory, make sure to close the cover. Otherwise, foreign objects or water may
enter during cleaning, resulting in failure of the equipment.

Do not insert the USB memory again immediately after you have removed it. The
USB memory might not be recognized if it is re-inserted immediately after removal.
(3) Operation when no USB memory is inserted
When there is no USB memory inserted, an alarm will be generated. Normal
operation can be run but the data will not be recorded.
(4) Operation when USB memory capacity is exceeded
When USB memory capacity is exceeded, an alarm will be generated.
After the alarm, data will not be recorded to the USB memory. Move data to a PC
periodically to avoid capacity overflow.

(5) Using the recommended USB memory
Use the recommended USB memory. Operation cannot be guaranteed for USB
memory other than that one.
■ Installing USB memory

This section describes how to install USB memory.
Cap
1 Turn the cap counter-clockwise
Open Close
to open the USB port.
4 Maintenance
2 Lift the cap and insert the USB memory

to the metal detector.
Be careful with the USB memory direction
when inserting it.
USB memory
3 Turn the cap clockwise to close the USB port.

5 Appendix
70
■ Removing USB memory
This section describes how to remove USB memory.
1 Basic Operations
To remove USB memory safely, make sure to perform the “removal” operation in the metal
detector.
1 Select Help "?" → "Eject USB".
2 Turn the cap counter-clockwise to open
the USB port.
Cap
Open Close

3 Make sure that the LED on the USB memory is not blinking.
If USB memory is removed during data recording, files may be destroyed and become
unreadable. Before removing USB memory, make sure that data is not being recorded by
checking the LED on the USB memory.
Especially when measured values are being recorded in high production capacity, USB memory
may be accessed more than 10 seconds after the last product is fed. Make sure to check the
LED blinking state before removing USB memory.
4 Maintenance
4 Remove the USB memory from the metal detector, and turn the cap clockwise to close
the port.
5 Appendix
71
■ File/folder configuration of USB memory
Data recorded by the metal detector is stored in folders sorted by date. As device
information, folders can optionally be set with a Level 1 and Level 2 “Line Name” and
“Sub-number”.
1 Basic Operations
“Record Type” and “Serial number” are automatically added to a file name. The serial
number counts up in the following cases, and a new file is created. When the date
changes, the serial number returns to 00. When the serial number is 00, addition of the
serial number to the file name is omitted.
■ If the data size of one file exceeds 1 MB

■ When USB memory is installed
■ When the power is turned on again
Image of folder auto generation

Level 1 folder
Level 2 folder
Record type Record data
Header
MD HEADER.csv
Record
Directory Record data
Year/Month/Day (RecordType_SerialNumber.csv)
History
Record HIST 20120913 HACT.csv
Directory 20120914 HPRM.csv
HNG.csv
HALM.csv
HOPCHK.csv
Individual RECORD 20120913 INDIV.csv
Record
Directory INDIV_01.csv
20120914 INDIV.csv
4 Maintenance
INDIV_01.csv
Statistics
Record STATS 20120913 STTS.csv
Directory
20120914 STTS.csv
Parameter
Record PARAM 20120913 PP.csv
Directory
20120914 PCOM.csv
5 Appendix
“Level 1”, “Level 2”, “Record Type”, and “Year/Month/Day” folders are created automatically by
this unit.
72
■ USB memory storage settings
(Maint. and Setting → Unit/connected device set. → USB memory → Set USB memory
store)
1 Basic Operations
When data is recorded to USB memory, the Level-1 Folder and Level-2 Folder can
optionally be specified to identify the device. To manage recorded data, specify folder
names before use. By adding an expiration date to data recorded to USB memory,
insufficient capacity of USB memory can be resolved.
Setting
Name Description
(Default:_)
Sets the USB memory folder structure.
USB Memory Level-1 Disable Disable Sets the standard folder structure.
Folder Enable Sets a specified character string to the
Enable
folder name.
Sets folder name for the USB memory folder
USB Memory Level-1 (Up to 4
structure. Do not enter a single-byte space at the
Folder Name characters)
beginning of a folder name.
Sets the USB memory folder structure.
USB Memory Level-2 Disable Disable Sets the standard folder structure.
Folder Enable Sets a specified character string to the

Enable
folder name.
Sets folder name for the USB memory folder
USB Memory Level-2
00 (0 to 99) structure. Do not enter a single-byte space at the
Folder Name
beginning of a folder name.
Sets the time limit for data saved to USB memory.
Data folders in the USB memory stick are checked
USB Memory Data 0
and expired folders are deleted automatically. This
Time Limit (0 to 365 days)
function frees up space in USB memory. No limit is
set when it is set to 0.
Select the details of the inspection result to be
4 Maintenance
saved.
No Does not save the inspection result.
No
All Saves all of the inspection result.
Individual save to ALL
USB memory Only NG Saves the inspection result of NG
Only NG products only. NG products include
MDNG
MDNG, EXTNG, and Dbl Prod.
Saves the inspection result of MDNG
MDNG
product.
Enables and disables the function to automatically
5 Appendix
Store at operation No
save the operation check results into USB memory
check end Yes
at the end of the operation check.
73
When setting a data expiration date, set the number of days in which recorded data becomes
unnecessary. Auto deletion of data is performed when the power is turned on. Make sure to
insert USB memory before turning on the power.
1 Basic Operations
If no data expiration date is used for operation, save the data in the USB memory to the PC
periodically to make sure the USB memory will have free space.
■ Folder and file names

Measured value data is saved as “INDIV_ΔΔ.csv” (ΔΔ indicates a serial number) under
the folder “RECORD”.
Data items are recorded to USB memory in the CSV format (comma-delimited) in the
order of the table below.
Item Remarks
ID Code Measured value ID code [ ] (space)
Product No. Product No.
Measured Value Output No. Serial number for recording measurement data
Date and Time Measurement date and time YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS
Normal : Space
MDNG : 0
EXNG : 1
Option Code
When evaluations are entered simultaneously, option code is
output in the following order of priority.
MDNG > EXNG
Value RJ 3 levels
0 D-Prod.
2 OK
3
4
5
4 Maintenance
6
7
Rank Code
8
9
A
B
C
D
5 Appendix
E NG
F OVERFLOW
74
Item Remarks
(blank)
Metal Eval. Level 1 Detection sensitivity/evaluation limit factor
1 Basic Operations
RJ check result
*Only when the RJ check option is used
If the result is 2, 3, or 4, option code is set to 2 of RJ check error
(RJNG). If the result is 4, rank code is output as 0.
If it is 4, it is not included in statistics because the product is not
evaluated. Be careful because the counts of statistics and
measured value output result may become different.
Upper: RJ check PASS side detection
Value
Lower: RJ check NG side detection
Product was rejected correctly at NG evaluation.
(Not passing PASS side photocell)
0
Product was passed correctly at OK evaluation.
(Not passing NG side photocell)

Product was passed correctly at OK evaluation.
(Passing PASS side photocell)
1
RJ Check Result Product was rejected correctly at NG evaluation.
(Passing NG side photocell)
Product was not passed at OK evaluation.
(Not passing PASS side photocell)
2
Product was rejected at OK evaluation.
Product was passed at NG evaluation. 4 Maintenance
3
Product was passed at NG evaluation.
(Not passing NG side photocell)
Product was passed at no evaluation.
4
Product was rejected at no evaluation.
RJ check was interrupted after measurement
5
completion.
5 Appendix
75
An image of measured value data recorded to USB memory is shown below.
Opened in Notepad
1 Basic Operations
Opened in Microsoft Excel

If Microsoft Excel is installed, double-click the file to open Excel and load the CSV file.
■ Saving operation check data

4 Maintenance
Setting
Name Description
(Default: _)
Sets ON/OFF of the function to automatically save
Store at Operation operation check result at the end of an operation
No/Yes check.
Check End
Ope.Check …(Eva/RJ Confirmation)
(1) Folder and file names

History data is saved with the following file names (ΔΔ indicates a serial number) under
the folder “HIST”.
5 Appendix
Operation Check History (Eva/RJ Confirmation): HOPCHK_ΔΔ.csv
76
(2) Record format
Item Description
1 Basic Operations
ID Code History type “4”
History Type Outputs history type.
Product Name Product name
History No. History serial number
Date and Time YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS
Event Event occurred
Result Result
User Access level
Test Piece Size (Fe) Set value
Test Piece Size (SUS) Set value
Test Piece Size (Non-Fe) Set value
Metal Eval. Level 1 Set value

Criteria N Criteria
Eval. Res. N Evaluation result
Evaluation value 1 N Evaluation value 1
Evaluation value 2 N Evaluation value 2 Output by repeating the number
Evaluation value 3 N Evaluation value 3 of times specified for checking
(N)
Evaluation value 4 N Evaluation value 4
Rejection N Rejection
4 Maintenance
Pass/NG of check
Result N
result
5 Appendix
77
■ Saving total statistics data
Select “Menu”  “USB memory”  “Save to
USB memory”, select the target item to save
from the list in the left part of the screen, and
1 Basic Operations
press [Save]. The screen on the right is for

saving “Product statistics”.
To save all registered product data, check
“Save all product data” before saving.

Total statistics data is saved as “STTS_ΔΔ.csv” (ΔΔ indicates a serial number) under the
folder “STATS”.
(2) Record format

Item Description
ID Code Total statistics data ID code [C]
Total Statistics Output No. Number of times total statistics are output
Compilation Start Total statistics start date and time YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS
Compilation End Total statistics end date and time YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS
Statistics Method 1 (Fix)
Lot No. Lot No.
OK OK
NG Metal NG count
EXNG External input NG count
4 Maintenance
EXNG2 External input NG count 2

Double Product Double product count
Total Total count
Test Piece Size (Fe) Set value
Test Piece Size (SUS) Set value
Test Piece Size (Non-Fe) Set value
5 Appendix

78
■ Saving parameter data
Similarly, select [Parameter] and press [Save].
1 Basic Operations
Parameter data is saved with the following
file names (ΔΔ indicates a serial number)
under the folder “PARAM”.
PCOM_ΔΔ.csv: common parameter
PP_ΔΔ.csv: Product Parameter
(2) Record format


Item Description
ID Code Parameter type “P”
System parameter
Parameter Type
Product parameter
Product No. 001 to 200 / -
Parameter Out No. Serial number of output parameter
Channel Output when parameter has a channel
Name Parameter name
4 Maintenance
Setting Value Parameter value

5 Appendix
79
■ Saving history data
Similarly, select [History] and press [Save].
Type: Operation History / Parameter

1 Basic Operations
History / NG History / Alarm

History / Operation Check
History
Target: Output all product data
 All products
Output data for one product
 Only selected products
Out. range: All data

 All data recorded in history
Past 24 hours
 Data recorded in the past 24 hours

History data is saved with the following file names (ΔΔ indicates a serial number) under
the folder “HIST”.
Operation History: HACT_ΔΔ.csv

Parameter History: HPRM_ΔΔ.csv
NG History: HNG_ΔΔ.csv
Alarm History: HALM_ΔΔ.csv
Operation Check History (Eva/RJ Confirmation): HOPCHK_ΔΔ.csv
(2) Record format

4 Maintenance
Operation History, Parameter History, NG History and Alarm History
Item Description
ID Code History type “4”
History Type Outputs history type.
Product No.
Product No.
(“-” is the output if product does not exist)
5 Appendix
History No. History serial number

80
Item Description
Mode Equipment mode when the event occurred
Event Event occurred
1 Basic Operations
Description Description
For the formats of Operation Check History (Eva/RJ Confirmation), refer to the following;
 P. 76 Saving operation check data
■ Saving USB information

(1) Displaying USB memory information
Total Space Displays total space of USB
memory.
Used Space Displays used space of USB
memory.
Free Space Displays free space of USB

memory.
When no USB memory is inserted, “- - -” is displayed.

(2) Format
USB memory can be formatted by pressing the [Format] button.
When data cannot be recorded to the USB memory, format the USB memory. USB
memory can be formatted on the metal detector or on a PC.
Once USB memory is formatted, all data is erased. Erased data cannot be recovered.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
81
Reference: Formatting USB memory on a PC
1 Open [My Computer].

1 Basic Operations
2 Right-click the USB memory drive, and select [Format].

4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
82
3 Make sure that the file system is “FAT”, and press [Start].
1 Basic Operations
Make sure that the
file system is “FAT.”
Make sure to format the USB memory as a “FAT” file system. USB memory formatted with a file
system other than “FAT” does not operate on this unit. Leave Volume Label blank. If Volume
Label is used, it may not operate.

4 When the completion message is displayed, formatting is complete.
■ Saving support data

Save data to support recovery in case of
equipment failure.
When asked by an Anritsu SE, save data in
this screen and provide the data.
 P. 236 Outputting support data (only when 4 Maintenance
the USB memory option is used)
5 Appendix
83
> Setting External I/O Signals
This section describes input and output signals for external control.
To adjust I/O timing, refer to "Adjusting I/O Timing”.
1 Basic Operations
 P. 107 Adjusting I/O Timing
This metal detector has two contact inputs and two contact outputs as standard. When an
optional KCU2504A is added, 8 more points can be added. For an overview of I/O
settings, refer to the table below.
Destination I/O Input Setting I/O Output Setting

IN1 OUT1
Standard I/O
IN2 OUT2
OUTA1, OUTA2, OUTA3,
KCU2504A INA1, INA2, INA3, INA4,
OUTA4, OUTA5, OUTA6,
Expansion I/O (optional) INA5, INA6, INA7, INA8
OUTA7, OUTA8
For expansion by Anritsu OUTB1, OUTB2, OUTB3,
INB1, INB2, INB3, INB4,
service engineer OUTB4, OUTB5, OUTB6,
INB5, INB6, INB7, INB8
* These are not available. OUTB7, OUTB8
For Signal Tower, Buzzer
– OUTP1, OUTP2, OUTP3
(both optional)
1 In the “Menu” screen, select “Maint. and Setting”  “Unit/connected device set.” 
“Gen. I/O connection”.
4 Maintenance
Performing I/O input settings
2 Perform settings and enter values for the items displayed.

5 Appendix
Input setting for IN1 When “Type” of IN1 is pressed
84
Select the target destination and press [Input]. The input screen is displayed. For
descriptions of the items, refer to the table below.
Types of input signals
1 Basic Operations
Type Description
– No signal input
This is the Operate/Stop switch input.
Switches between operation and stop every time this input is set to
ON. Set the input ON time at 100 ms or faster.
Mot.ON/OFF This signal cannot be used at the same time as “Mot.ON/OFF
(Momentary) (Alternate)” or “Mot.ON/OFF2 (Alternate)”. When both signals are set,
this signal is prioritized.
If this input is switched to stop while the IO output signal “Error” is ON,
turn it OFF.
The device is in the operating status while this input is ON.
Mot.ON/OFF This input cannot be used at the same time as the “Mot.ON (Pulse
(Alternate) input)” signal. When both signals are set, this signal is prioritized.
If this input is switched to stop while the IO output signal “Error” is ON,
turn it OFF.
Run input. The Metal detector runs while this input is ON.
However, the Mot.OFF (Par. Priority) input has priority over this input
and this input cannot stop the Metal detector. Use the Mot.OFF (Par.

Mot.ON (Pulse input) Priority) input to stop the Metal detector. The signal ON time must be
at least 100 ms.
In addition, the “Mot.OFF (Par. Priority)” input has priority over this
input.
Mot.OFF The conveyor motor is forcibly stopped while this signal is ON. The
(Par. Priority) conveyor motor cannot be set to ON while this signal is ON.
Input for rejecting products in EXNG direction irrespective of

evaluation result. The rejector gate operates at the same timing as at
External NG input weight NG. For a bulk inspection, select External NG input 2
(Continuous + Synchronous).
(Synchronous)
For bulk-type products, use EXNG (Continuous + Synchronous).
 P. 288 T iming Chart
4 Maintenance

evaluation result. The rejector gate operates in the EXNG direction
External NG input while this signal is ON. However, to avoid the risk of rejector gate jams
(Continuous + Synchronous) during normal rejector gate operation intervals (T4), the gate operates
after the rejector gate operation.
For box-type products, use EXNG (Synchronous).
Error reset Input for releasing errors and alarms
Clear Statistics Clears the statistics data.
5 Appendix
85
Type Description
evaluation result. The rejector gate operates at the same timing as at
weight NG.
1 Basic Operations
External NG input 2  P. 288 T iming Chart

(Synchronous) This signal can be used with the EXNG: S or EXNG: A.
EXNG2 is normally higher priority evaluation than EXNG. For the bulk
inspection, select External NG input 2 (Continuous + Synchronous).
For bulk-type products, use EXNG2 (Continuous + Synchronous).
evaluation result. The rejector gate operates in the EXNG direction
while this signal is ON. However, to avoid the risk of rejector gate jams
External NG input 2 during normal rejector gate operation intervals (T4), the gate operates
(Continuous + Synchronous) after the rejector gate operation.
This signal can be used with the EXNG: S or EXNG: A.

EXNG2 is normally higher priority evaluation than EXNG.
For box-type products, use EXNG2 (Synchronous).
Input for detecting full rejected-products box.
When this input is continuously ON for more than 5 seconds, the
Indicator displays the “A070 Box Full” alarm to turn the Full detection
output to ON and full counting starts.
When the count reaches the set full count (except 0 and 9999), the
Metal detector conveyors are forcibly stopped.
Full detection When the full count is set to 0, the Metal detector displays an alarm
and stops the conveyors. When the full count is set to 9999, the Metal
detector does not stop the conveyors.
The alarm will be deactivated automatically after this input changes
from ON to OFF, and the full detection output goes OFF and the count
will be re-set to 0.
This input can be used along with the optional rejection confirmation
function.
All Clear Clears statistics data.
This switches the Metal detector to the Conveyor mode while this
Forced motor ON input signal is ON even if the Metal detector is in normal operation.
(Alternate) However, when a conveyor error is generated, the Metal detector
cannot run (in the Conveyor mode) even if this input goes ON.
4 Maintenance
Switches between operation and stop every time this input is set to
ON. Set the input ON time at 100 ms or faster.
Mot.ON/OFF2 This signal cannot be used at the same time as “Mot.ON/OFF
(Momentary) (Alternate)” or “Mot.ON/OFF2 (Alternate)”. When both signals are set,
this signal is prioritized.
Even if this input is switched to stop, the IO output signal “Error” is not
turned OFF.
The device is in the operating status while this input is ON.
Mot.ON/OFF 2 This input cannot be used at the same time as the “Mot.ON (Pulse
(Alternate) input)” signal. When both signals are set, this signal is prioritized.
Even if this input is switched to stop, the IO output signal “Error” is not
5 Appendix
turned OFF.
86
Type Description
The conveyor motor is forcibly stopped while this signal is ON without
releasing error output.
Motor ON disabled
Use the “Motor. OFF(Par. Priority)” input for releasing error output with
the conveyor-motor stop at the same time.
1 Basic Operations
Conveyor 2 Speed Conveyor 2 speed: This signal cannot be used.
This is a conveyor error input signal. Error 161 occurs if this signal
Carrying Unit Error
becomes active.
NGBOX RJ1 These input signals are used to indicate the open states of the
NGBOX RJ2 corresponding NGBoxes with electronic locks (optional).
If one of these signals becomes active, the corresponding NGBox is
NGBOX RJ4 regarded to be open. If the NGBox open state continues for 5 seconds
NGBOX RJ5 or more, alarm A072 occurs.
Input for monitoring the air pressure. Error 061 “Air pressure error” is
Air Pressure Detection
output if this signal is enabled (ON).
Signal input to restart feeding of products after the conveyor has been
NG reset signal temporarily stopped. If NG-prod Proc. is Rev. Rej. and products are
(momentary switch) temporarily stopped, operation can be resumed by setting this input
signal to active.
Setting this input to ON starts the judgment/rejecting operation
Judgment/Rejection
confirmation.
confirmation start This signal cannot be used with Smart Guide.
When using the Reverse Reject function, the conveyor operates in
Motor reverse
reverse mode while this input signal is active. (Option)

OptionInput1
OptionInput2
Settings for options
OptionInput3
OptionInput4
Make sure that the operator is safe before operating or stopping the equipment externally.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
87
Types of output signals
Output
Type Type Signal Explanation (at standard output type)
Setting
1 Basic Operations
– No signal output
Standard
Motor. ON This signal is ON while the metal detector conveyor is running.
Pulse
This signal is ON while the metal detector is in an abnormal status
ABNORMAL Standard (EXXX displayed).
Pulse
Hold 2 This signal is ON when the metal detector is in an abnormal status
BUZZER
and when is it stopped by NG products in the NG Stop mode.
This signal is ON when the metal detector is able to perform
measurement.
Measurable Standard This signal is OFF when the metal detector is stopping, performing
adjusting timing, performing Operation check, performing Auto
setting, generating error, NG Stop, and Conveyor Mode.
This signal is ON when the following alarm occurrs and product is
RJ Alarm
Standard discharged in alarm direction.
Direction
Target: A051 to A055, A504
OK
Pulse These signals go ON at each respective evaluation.
Eval output
MDNG
Hold 1 Note:
EXNG
RJ Sync When the evaluation output is MDNG or external NG or
EXNG2 Hold 2 external NG2, both of the NG go ON at the same time.
D-Prod.
This signal is the evaluation output strobe signal and goes ON 10 -
Timing Pulse
20 ms after the evaluation output.
Standard
Pulse
Hold 1 This signal goes ON when a NG (MDNG, EXNG and Dbl. Prod.)
NG output Reject evaluation occurs.
sync
Hold 2
Rejection Standard
4 Maintenance
This signal goes ON when a rejector error occurs when the optional
confirmation Pulse
rejector confirmation function is installed.
error output Hold 2
This goes ON when the printer out-of-paper alarm occurs. It goes
No paper alarm Standard
OFF when the alarm is released.
This output goes ON when the Full detection input is ON for 5
Full detection Standard
seconds. It goes OFF when the Full detection input is OFF.
This signal is output when the products are evaluated as OK.
Pulse Note:
Hold 1 It is not output at MDNG, external NG, external NG2 , Double
OK Output Reject
product, Evaluation timing alarm, Evaluation disable alarm or
sync
5 Appendix
Product Length Exceeded alarm, even when the products are

Hold 2
evaluated as OK.
88
Output
Type Type Signal Explanation (at standard output type)
Setting
Monitoring
This checks the controller CPU at starting and outputs a 500-ms
output for CPU Standard
1 Basic Operations
pulse when operation is normal.
operation
Standard
Conveyor error
Pulse This goes ON when a conveyor error is generated.
output
Hold 2
Serial Output signal for optional KW255A and KW2504A/B.

Communication Standard This alarm is output when an error occurs at serial
Alarm communications.
USB Memory
Standard This alarm is output when an USB-related error occurs.
Related Alarm
NGBOX OPEN
Standard
RJ1 These output signals are used to enable the corresponding
NGBOX OPEN NGBoxes with electronic locks (optional) to open.
Standard
RJ2 These signals become active if the NGBoxes are unlocked,
NGBOX OPEN enabling the NGBoxes to open.
Standard These signals do not become active if they are selected while no
RJ4
NGBOX OPEN NGBox with an electronic lock is connected.
Standard
RJ5
Output OUT1 by reset pulse when the safety relay unit is mounted.

Type Type
Safety relay reset Pulse
Logic Logic
Latency Latency
Checking This signal gose ON upon starting Eval/RJ Check and Check Mode
Standard
operation when they are used respectively.
Standard This signal goes ON when the product blocks the photocell during
Detect product
Pulse running or stopping. This is not available during bulk inspection.
Standard When running conveyor back and forth for auto-set, this outputs
CW/CCW motor
Pulse OFF on normal rotation. Outputs ON on reverse rotation.
OptionOutput1
4 Maintenance
OptionOutput2
– Settings for options
OptionOutput3
OptionOutput4
5 Appendix
89
Logic, Type, Delay Time, and Hold Time settings
Setting
No. Name Description
(Default: _)
1 Basic Operations
Output signal logic can be set as follows:

Not Reverse
1 Logic Not Reverse Signal not reversed
Reverse
Reverse Signal reversed
This screen sets the output type.
The operation is not assured when selecting a type that is
not shown in the table on the above.
Pulse ON only for set Hold time
Hold1 ON until end of evaluation of next product.
Pulse ON only during rejector gate operation time

RJ Sync
Hold 1 (T4 interval)
2 Type RJ Sync ON continuously until one of
Hold 2 [Recover] / [Stop] button pressed, or until
Standard ERR RES (Error reset) input signal input.
Hold2
“I/O Output signal On” is displayed when
the output signal is ON if the “Hold 2” is set
to the signal.
Operates as described in table on previous
Standard
page
0 ms
3 Delay time This screen is used to set the Output ON delay time.
(0 to 9999 ms)
0 ms This screen is used to set the signal hold time. It is only
4 HOLD time
(0 to 9999 ms) enabled when “Pulse” is selected as the output type.
For connection terminals, refer to Appendix “External I/O Specifications” and “Timing
Chart”.
 P. 278 External I/O Specifications, P. 288 Timing Chart
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
90
Usually use “IO input setting”. Use “IO input setting (Details)” when setting the logical
combination of the signal.
IO input setting (Details)
1 Basic Operations
(Maint. and Setting → Unit/connected device set. → Gen. I/O connection → IO input
setting(Details).)
Setting
Name Description
(Default: _)
Input Signal ID No Input Displays the signal name.
Selects the input terminal No. of terminal block.
Corresponding numbers are described below: Do not
change.
Input Terminal
0 to 255 IN1.2 180, 181
No. 1
INA1 to INA8 182 to 189
INB1 to INB8 190 to 197
Not Reverse Specifies the logic of the input signal from the selected
Input Logic 1
Reverse terminal.
Specifies the delay time of the input signal from the
Delay Time 1 0 to 9999
selected terminal.

Delay Time 1 Specifies the delay time of the input signal from the
0 to 9999
(Low) selected terminal.
Signal Specifies the logical connection of the signals input
None/And/Or
Connection 1 from the input terminal No. n and [n+1].
change.
Input Terminal
0 to 255
No. 2 IN1.2 180, 181
4 Maintenance
Input Logic 2
Reverse terminal.
selected terminal.
0 to 9999
None/And/Or
5 Appendix
91
Setting
Name Description
(Default: _)
1 Basic Operations
change.
Input Terminal
0 to 255 IN1.2 180, 181
No. 3
Input Logic 3
Reverse terminal.
selected terminal.
0 to 9999
None/And/Or
Rejector
Conveyor
Checkweigher
Metal detector
X-ray inspect.
Destination system Sets the connection of input signal.
Weigher
Packager
Labeler
Other inspect.
system
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
92
Usually use “IO output setting”. Use “IO output setting (Details)” when setting the
combination of the signal.
IO output setting (Details)
1 Basic Operations
(Maint. and Setting → Unit/connected device set. → Gen. I/O connection → IO output
setting (Details) )
Setting
Name Description
(Default: _)
change.
Output Terminal
0 to 255 OUT1.2 80, 81
No.
OUTA1 to OUTA8 82 to 89
OUTB1 to OUTB8 90 to 97
Output Signal
No Output Displays the signal name.
ID1
Pulse
Hold1
Specifies the format of the signal output from the
Output Type 1 RJ Sync.

output terminal block.
Hold2
Standard
Not Reverse Specifies the logic of the signal output from the output
Output Logic 1
Reverse terminal block.
Specifies the delay time of the signal output from the
Hold Time 1 0 to 9999
Signal Specifies the logical connection of the signals output
None/And/Or
Connection 1 from the output terminal No. n and [n+1].
4 Maintenance
Output Signal * Same as Output

* Same as Output Signal ID1
ID2 Signal ID1
Pulse
Hold1
Hold2
Standard
Output Logic 2
5 Appendix

93
Setting
Name Description
(Default: _)
1 Basic Operations

None/And/Or
Output Signal * Same as Output
* Same as Output Signal ID1
ID3 Signal ID1
Pulse
Hold1
Hold2
Standard
Output Logic 3
None/And/Or
Rejector
Conveyor
Checkweigher
Metal detector
X-ray inspect.
Destination system Sets the connection of output signal.
Weigher
Packager
Labeler
Other inspect.
4 Maintenance
system
5 Appendix
94
Extension I/O connection setting
(Maint. and Setting → Unit/connected device set. → Gen. I/O connection → Extension
I/O connection setting)
1 Basic Operations
Setting
Name Description
(Default: _)
Selects the method of treating error occurring upon
abnormal IO-NET connection.
This parameter is set to Yes if the
EXT-I/O (channel A) connection is
detected when the power is turned to
Extension I/O Auto Auto
ON. This parameter is not changed to
(A): Connection No
No when the EXT-I/O (channel A) is
monitoring Yes not connected.
Restrains the occurrence of the
No
Generates the occurrence of the
Yes
Selects the method of treating error occurring upon
This parameter is set to Yes if the

EXT-I/O (channel B) connection is
detected when the power is turned to
Extension I/O Auto Auto
ON.EXT-I/O This parameter is not
(B): Connection No
changed to No when the EXT-I/O
monitoring Yes (channel B) is not connected.
Restrains the occurrence of the
No
Generates the occurrence of the
Yes
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
95
■ Serial connection (option)
When inputting and outputting data through external devices such as code reader, specify
the settings by referring to the table below.
1 Basic Operations
Serial1 Setting
(Maint. and Setting → Unit/connected device set. → Serial connection → Serial1
Setting)
* The items displayed differ depending on the Serial1:Connection setting.

*1 Three digits (up to 200 products) can be used for the product No. in the message.
Setting
Name Description
(Default: _)
Select the connection method of Serial1 I/O.
No No Does not connect to the external device.

Yes Yes Connects to the external device.
Serial1:Connection
Labeler Labeler Connects to the Label printer.
Code Reader
Makes a connection with a code reader
Code Reader
(optional).
1200, 2400,
Serial1:Transfer
4800, 9600 Selects the transfer speed of Serial1 I/O.

Speed
bps
No
Serial1:Parity EVEN Selects the parity of Serial1 I/O.
ODD
1
Serial1:Stop Bit Selects the start/stop bit of Serial1 I/O.
2
No
Serial1:flow control Sets the flow control method of serial communication.
RTS
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
96
Setting
Name Description
(Default: _)
This is used to set whether evaluation results are output
or not.
1 Basic Operations
No Does not output evaluation results.
Standard Outputs evaluation results.
Outputs details are output as well as the
Expansion
No output items in “Standard” setting.
Standard Outputs details (other than Expansion 1)
Serial1:Eval. Expansion Expansion 2 are output as well as the output items in
Output Expansion 2 “Standard” setting.
Expansion 3 Outputs "Expansion" and "Expansion 2"
Expansion 4 Expansion 3 details in addition to the output items in
"Standard" setting.*1
Outputs evaluation results for each
measurement with the product number
Expansion 4 (No. 001 to 200), evaluated value,
product effect value, and phase value
appended.*1
This is used to set the delay time until the result is output
Serial1:Eval.

0 to the PC from when the product is interrupted by the
output delay
photocell.
Serial1:Out when No Selects whether to output evaluation results to the
ope check Yes external device during operation check.
Selects whether to link to the Product No..
No Does not output the product link to the
Serial1:Prod No. No
Yes serial I/O.
Link
Expansion Yes Outputs the product link to the serial I/O.
Expansion Outputs the product link to the serial I/O.*1
Selects whether to output them to the serial I/O when an
4 Maintenance
error or alarm occurs.

Serial1:Err. Alarm No
Does not output errors and alarms to the
Output Yes No
serial1 I/O.
Yes Outputs errors and alarms the serial1 I/O.
Selects the type of state change output to the serial1 I/O.
Does not output state change to the serial1
No
No I/O.
Serial1:State Chg.
Yes Adds the product No. and outputs the state
Output Yes
Expansion change.
5 Appendix
Adds the product No. and outputs the state

Expansion
change.*1
97
Setting
Name Description
(Default: _)
Does not output the evaluated value and
No effect value of a bulk product to the serial1
1 Basic Operations
Serial1:Bulk data I/O.

No/Yes
output Outputs the evaluated value/effect value of
Yes bulk products to the serial1 I/O only when
detecting NG data.
Does not output the noise effect value to
No
Serial1:Noise the serial1 I/O.
No/Yes
Output Outputs the noise effect value to the serial1
Yes
I/O.
Select the contents to be output when the evaluation

value or effect value is OVF.
No
Serial1:OVF Output Outputs 99.99 for the evaluation value, or
Yes No
the effect value is output as it is.
Yes Outputs a space for OVF.
Leave it as Old (Default setting).
Serial1:Comm. Old
Old KD80XX series
message New
New Devices later than KD80XX
Specifies whether to read the item code in the product

barcode by the barcode reader.
The item code cannot be read by the
No
Serial1:Item code No barcode reader. Enter the item code using
Yes
the touch panel.
The item code can be read by the barcode
Yes
reader.
Serial1:Item code 2 Specifies the start digit of the item code in the product
(start digit) (1 to 20) barcode.
Specifies the number of digits of the item code in the
4 Maintenance
Serial1:Item code 6 product barcode.

(digit count) (0 to 20) If “0” is specified, the start digit and the subsequent
digits are regarded as the item code.
Specifies whether to read the user code in the barcode of
the user by the barcode reader.
The user code cannot be read by the
No
Serial1:User code No barcode reader. Enter the user code using
Yes
the touch panel.
The user code can be read by the barcode
5 Appendix
Yes
reader.
98
Setting
Name Description
(Default: _)
Serial1:User code 1 Specifies the start digit of the user code in the barcode of
(start digit) (1 to 10) the user.
1 Basic Operations
Specifies the number of digits of the user code in the
Serial1:User code 0 barcode of the user.
digits are regarded as the user code.
Serial2(A) settings (option)

(Maint. and Setting → Unit/connected device set. → Serial connection → Serial2(A)
settings)
* The items displayed differ depending on the Serial2(A):Connection setting.
Setting
Name Description
(Default: _)
Select the connection method of Serial2(A) I/O.
Does not connect to the external
No
No device.

Yes Connects to the external device
Anritsu Yes (other than Anritsu Product,
Serial2(A):Connection Labeler or Code Reader).
Product
Labeler Anritsu Product Connects to the Anritsu device.
Code Reader Labeler Connects to the Labeler.
Makes a connection with a code
Code Reader
reader (optional).
Serial2(A):transfer RS232C
Sets the transmission standard (transfer method).
method Current loop
1200, 2400,
4 Maintenance
Serial2(A):Transfer
4800, 9600 Selects the transfer speed of Serial2(A) I/O.
Speed
bps
No
Serial2(A):Parity EVEN Selects the parity of Serial2(A) I/O.
ODD
1
Serial2(A):Stop Bit Selects the start/stop bit of Serial2(A) I/O.
* Read only
No Sets the flow control method of serial2(A)
Serial2(A):flow control
RTS communication.
5 Appendix
99
Setting
Name Description
(Default: _)
This is used to set whether evaluation results are
output or not.
1 Basic Operations

Outputs details are output as well as
Expansion 1
No the output items in “Standard” setting.
Standard Outputs details (other than Expansion
Serial2(A):Eval. Expansion 1 Expansion 2 1) are output as well as the output
Output Expansion 2 items in “Standard” setting.*
Expansion 3 Outputs "Expansion" and "Expansion

Expansion 4 Expansion 3 2" details in addition to the output
items in "Standard" setting.*1
measurement with the product
Expansion 4 number (No. 001 to 200), evaluated
value, product effect value, and
phase value appended. *1
This is used to set the delay time until the result is
Serial2(A):Eval. output
0 output to the PC from when the product is interrupted

delay
by the photocell.
Serial2(A):Out when No Selects whether to output evaluation results to the
Select the type of product link output in serial2(A) I/O.
Does not output the product link when
No changing products or starting the
operation.
No Outputs the product link when changing

Serial2(A): Prod No. products or starting the operation. The
Yes Yes
Link
4 Maintenance
number of products in the telegraph to

Expansion
be output is up to 99.
Outputs the product link when changing
products or starting the operation. The
Expansion
number of products in the telegraph to
be output is up to 200.
5 Appendix
100
Setting
Name Description
(Default: _)
Select the item to be linked during standalone MD
linkage.
1 Basic Operations
Links with product change in the main
Product
Product and unit and with start/stop. The standalone
Serial2(A): Remote and
operation metal detector cannot start or stop by
link switch operation
Product only itself.
Links only with product change in the
Product
main unit. The standalone metal
only
detector can start or stop by itself.
Selects whether to output them to the serial2(A) I/O
when an error or alarm occurs.
Serial2(A):Err. Alarm No Does not output errors and alarms to the
No
Output Yes serial2(A) I/O.
Outputs errors and alarms the serial2(A)
Yes
I/O.
Selects the type of state change output to the serial2
I/O.
Does not output state change to the
No No

Serial2(A):State Chg. serial2(A) I/O.
Yes
Output Adds the product No. and outputs the
Expansion Yes
state change.
Adds the product No. and outputs the
Expansion
state change.*1
No effect value of a bulk product to the
Serial2(A):Bulk data No serial2(A) I/O.
output Yes Outputs the evaluated value/effect value
Yes of bulk products to the serial2(A) I/O
only when detecting NG data.
4 Maintenance

No
Serial2(A):Noise No the serial2(A) I/O.
Output Yes Outputs the noise effect value to the
Yes
serial2(A) I/O.
Serial2(A):OVF No
Outputs 99.99 for the evaluation value,
Output Yes No
or the effect value is output as it is.
5 Appendix
101
Setting
Name Description
(Default: _)
Leave it as Old (Default setting).
Serial2(A):Comm. Old
Old KD80XX series
1 Basic Operations
message New
New Devices later than KD80XX
No
Serial2(A):Item code No barcode reader. Enter the user code
Yes
using the touch panel.
The item code can be read by the
Yes
barcode reader.
Serial2(A):Item code 2 Specifies the start digit of the item code in the product
(start digit) (1 to18) barcode.
Specifies the number digits of the item code in of the
Serial2(A):Item code 6 product barcode.
Specifies whether to read the user code in the
barcode of the user by the barcode reader.

No
Serial2(A):User code No barcode reader. Enter the user code
Yes
The user code can be read by the
Yes
barcode reader.
Serial2(A):User code 1 Specifies the start digit of the user code in the barcode
(start digit) (1 to 10) of the user.
Serial2(A):User code barcode of the user.
0 (0 to 10)
(digit count) If “0” is specified, the start digit and the subsequent
4 Maintenance

5 Appendix
102
Serial3(B) settings (option)
(Maint. and Setting → Unit/connected device set. → Serial connection → Serial3(B)
settings)
1 Basic Operations
* The items displayed differ depending on the Serial3(B):Connection setting.
Setting
Name Description
(Default: _)
Select the connection method of Serial3(B) I/O.
Does not connect to the external
No
No device.
Yes Connects to the external device
Anritsu Yes (other than Anritsu Product,
Serial3(B):Connection Labeler or Code Reader).
Product
Labeler Anritsu Product Connects to the Anritsu device.
Code Reader Labeler Connects to the Labeler.
Makes a connection with a code
Code Reader
reader (optional).
Serial3(B):transfer RS232C
Sets the transmission standard (transfer method).
method Current loop

1200, 2400,
Serial3(B):Transfer
4800, 9600 Selects the transfer speed of Serial3(B) I/O.
Speed
bps
No
Serial3(B):Parity EVEN Selects the parity of Serial3(B) I/O.
ODD
1
Serial3(B):Stop Bit Selects the start/stop bit of Serial3(B) I/O.
* Read only
No Sets the flow control method of Serial3(B)
Serial3(B):flow control
RTS communication.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
103
Setting
Name Description
(Default: _)
This is used to set whether evaluation results are
output or not.
1 Basic Operations

Outputs details are output as well as
Expansion 1
No the output items in “Standard” setting.
Standard Outputs details (other than Expansion
Serial3(B):Eval. Expansion 1 Expansion 2 1) are output as well as the output
Output Expansion 2 items in “Standard” setting.
Expansion 3 Outputs "Expansion" and "Expansion

Expansion 4 Expansion 3 2" details in addition to the output
items in "Standard" setting.*1
measurement with the product
Expansion 4 number (No. 001 to 200), evaluated
value, product effect value, and
phase value appended.*1
This is used to set the delay time until the result is
Serial3(B):Eval.
0 output to the PC from when the product is interrupted

output delay
by the photocell.
Serial3(B): Out when No Selects whether to output evaluation results to the
Select the type of product link output in serial3(B) I/O.
Does not output the product link when
operation.
Outputs the product link when
Serial3(B): Product Yes
Yes
4 Maintenance
operation. The number of products in

link output
Expansion the telegraph to be output is up to 99.
Outputs the product link when
changing products or starting the
Expansion operation. The number of products in
the telegraph to be output is up to
200.
5 Appendix
104
Setting
Name Description
(Default: _)
Select the item to be linked during standalone MD
linkage.
1 Basic Operations
Links with product change in the main
Product and Product and unit and with start/stop. The
Serial3(B): Remote
operation operation standalone metal detector cannot
link switch
Product only start or stop by itself.
Links only with product change in the
Product only main unit. The standalone metal
detector can start or stop by itself.
Selects whether to output them to the serial3(B) I/O
when an error or alarm occurs.
Serial3(B):Err. Alarm No Does not output errors and alarms to
No
Output Yes the serial3(B) I/O.
Outputs errors and alarms the serial3(B)
Yes
I/O.
Selects the type of state change output to the serial3
I/O.
Does not output state change to the
No No

Serial3(B):State Chg. serial3(B) I/O.
Yes
Output Adds the product No. and outputs the
Expansion Yes
state change.
Expansion
state change.*1
Does not output the evaluated value
No and effect value of a bulk product to the
Serial3(B):Bulk data No serial3(B) I/O.
output Yes Outputs the evaluated value/effect
Yes value of bulk products to the serial3(B)
I/O only when detecting NG data.
4 Maintenance

No
Serial3(B):Noise No the serial3(B) I/O.
Output Yes Outputs the noise effect value to the
Yes
serial3(B) I/O.
Serial3(B):OVF No
Outputs 99.99 for the evaluation value,
Output Yes No
or the effect value is output as it is.
5 Appendix
105
Setting
Name Description
(Default: _)
Leave this as Old (default setting) during use.
Serial3(B):Comm. Old
Old: KD80xx
1 Basic Operations
message New
New: Devices later than KD80XX
No
Serial3(B):Item code No barcode reader. Enter the user code
Yes
The item code can be read by the
Yes
barcode reader.
Serial3(B):Item code 2 Specifies the start digit of the item code in the product
(start digit) (1 to18) barcode.
Specifies the number digits of the item code in of the
Serial3(B):Item code 6 product barcode.
Specifies whether to read the user code in the
barcode of the user by the barcode reader.

No
Serial3(B):User code No barcode reader. Enter the user code
Yes
The user code can be read by the
Yes
barcode reader.
Serial3(B):User code 1 Specifies the start digit of the user code in the
(start digit) (1 to 10) barcode of the user.
Serial3(B):User code 0 barcode of the user.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
106
> Adjusting I/O Timing
This screen monitors input and output signals for external control. Use this screen for
input and output signals that require a timing adjustment.
1 Basic Operations
In the “Menu” screen, select “Maint. and
Setting”  “Unit/connected device set.” From
“Gen. I/O connection”, select “I/O timing
adjustment”.
The adjustment screen shown on the right is
displayed.

Description of the buttons on the top and bottom of the screen
Sets a channel to monitor trigger detection timing of [UP] and [DOWN] as
Trigger CH
set in the event.
DOWN Detects a signal when it goes from ON to OFF.
Event UP Detects a signal when it goes from OFF to ON.
No Does not detect events.
Loop Displays the signal regardless of events.
Display
Stationary Displays the signal when an event occurs.
4 Maintenance
When one of items 1 to 8 in the left side of the screen is tapped while
[Input] is displayed, the settings for the item such as signal type and delay
Input
time can be changed.
Signals must be set in advance.
When one of items 1 to 8 in the left side of the screen is tapped while [Set]
Set
is displayed, the signal to display is selected.
Get St. Starts capturing waveform data and displays the data.
Clear Clears the signal displayed on the screen.

5 Appendix
107
> Connecting Ethernet (LAN) (option)
When connecting to the network via Ethernet, specify the settings by referring to the table
below.
1 Basic Operations
Network common settings

(Maintenance and Setting  Unit/connected device set.  Network connection 
Network common settings)
Setting
Name Description
(Default: _)
IP Address 192.168.0.100 Sets the IP address of the metal detector.
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 Sets the subnet mask of the metal detector.
Default
192.168.0.1 Sets the default gateway of the metal detector.
Gateway
The MAC address of the metal detector. It cannot be
xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx changed.
MAC Address
* Read only The MAC address varies depending on the individual
item.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
108
Comm. content settings
Comm. content settings)
1 Basic Operations
*Three digits (up to 200 products) can be used for the product No. in the message.
Setting
Name Description
(Default: _)
Network: No
Sets whether to connect to the network.
Connection Yes
Standard
Network: Applicable
QUICCA Selects the applicable connection.
connection
Mobile monitor
This is used to set whether evaluation results are output
or not.
No Does not output evaluation results
Standard Outputs evaluation results
Outputs details are output as well as the
Expansion
No output items in “Standard” setting.
Standard Outputs details (other than Expansion 1)
Network:Eval. Expansion Expansion 2 are output as well as the output items in

Output Expansion 2 “Standard” setting.
Expansion 3 Outputs "Expansion" and "Expansion 2"
Expansion 4 Expansion3 details in addition to the output items in
"Standard" setting.*
measurement with the product number
Expansion 4 (No. 001 to 200), evaluated value,
product effect value, and phase value
appended. *
This is used to set the delay time until the result is output
Network:Evaluation
4 Maintenance
0 to the PC from when the product is interrupted by the
output delay time
photocell.
Selects whether to output evaluation results to the
external device during operation check.
Network: Out when No Does not output evaluation value at
No
ope check Yes operation check.
Outputs evaluation value at operation
Yes
check.
Selects whether to notify the network or not when an
5 Appendix
Network:Error alarm No error: alarm occurs.

output Yes No Does not output error or alarm.
Yes Outputs error or alarm.
109
Setting
Name Description
(Default: _)
Selects whether to output equipment state change to
external device.
1 Basic Operations
No No Does not output state change.

Network: State
Yes
change output Yes Outputs state change.
Expansion
Expansion
state change.*
No
Network:Bulk data No effect value of a bulk product.
output Yes Outputs the evaluated value and effect
Yes
value of a bulk product
Network:Noise No No Does not output the noise effect value.

Output Yes Yes Outputs the noise effect value.
Network:OVF No
Outputs 99.99 for the evaluation value, or
Output Yes No
the effect value is output as it is.
Network:Ext. No
Leave it as No (Default setting).
system output Yes
Set to New (default setting) before use.
Network:Comm. Old
Old: KD80XX
message New
New: Devices later than KD80XX
Sets message format of Ethernet communication. When
connecting to QUICCA, follow the procedures in the
Invld. QUICCA operation manual.
Network:ANP Used when connected to other than
Version 1
version No
Version 2 QUICCA
4 Maintenance
Version 1 Used when connected to QUICCA

Version 2 Used when connected to QUICCA
5 Appendix
110
Setting
Name Description
(Default: _)
Selects operation when a communication alarm occurs
during operation.
1 Basic Operations
When data accumulation function is available, generates
alarm when communication is disconnected and
Network:Proc. at Alarm
accumulation starts. After reaching limit, operates
comm. alarm Error according to the settings below.
Processes communication alarm as
Alarm
alarm.
Error Processes communication alarm as error.
This parameter specifies the number of seconds to wait
before the system considers that the periodic data from
QUICCA (optional) or the PC are terminated since they
are received last. The communication status is not
Network:Keep alive
10 monitored if 0 is specified.
timer
The connection status is indicated by the connection
status icon on the QUICCA connection status display
screen. This parameter is valid if “Ethernet” is specified
for the “Data out device” parameter.
This specifies on how to perform if the connection with

QUICCA (optional) or the PC is terminated during
operation.
Network:Proc. upon No No No special operation is performed.
disconnect Yes Outputs a error or alarm when communication is
disconnected. Whether error or alarm depends
Yes
on the setting of “Network:Proc. at comm.
Alarm”.
Network: Data Sets whether data accumulation function is used.
No/Yes
accum. Function Displayed when using network ANP version 2.
This license is required when connecting to the specified
4 Maintenance
No QUICCA.
Network:Connection
Yes
license No The network connection is not licensed.
* Read only
Yes The network connection is licensed.
5 Appendix
111
Time synchronization setting
Time synchronization setting)
1 Basic Operations
Setting
Name Description
(Default: _)
Network:SNTP No Selects whether to perform time synchronization with
time sync. Yes external server using NTP.
Network:SNTP
connect interval 0 to 60 (10) min
(M)
Specifies interval of NTP synchronization.
Network:SNTP
connect interval 0 to 59 (0) sec

(S)
Network:SNTP
255.255.255.255 Specifies IP address of NTP server.
server
Network:SNTP
-23 to +23 (+9)
TD adjustment
hour
(H) Specifies time difference between installation site and
Network:SNTP Greenwich mean time.
TD adjustment 0 to 59 (0) min
(M)
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
112
■ Setting on the PC
Start the “Command Prompt” on a PC connected to a common network, enter the ping
command with the IP address (e.g. ping 192.168.0.1), and press the [Enter] key.
1 Basic Operations
For Windows Me/2000/XP/Vista/7, select “All
Programs”  “Accessories”  “Command
prompt” to open the command prompt.
For Windows 8, select "All apps" or
displayed at the bottom of the start screen,
and select "Command prompt" to open the
command prompt.
For Windows 10, select "All apps"  "
Windows System Tool"  “Command
prompt” to open the command prompt.
• Network status
(Maint. and Setting → Unit/connected
device set. → Network connection →
Network status)

The network connection status is
displayed.
• Version upgrade
(Maint. and Setting → Unit/connected
device set. → Network connection
→Version upgrade)
This function updates the software of the
device. Use this function only when
4 Maintenance
requested by your dealer.
When the screen shown on the right is C:¥>ping 192.168.0.1 ← Command entered
displayed, network settings are complete. Pinging 192.168.0.1 with 32 bytes of data:
Reply from 192.168.0.1: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=128

Ping statistics for 192.168.0.1:

Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 4, Lost = 0 (0% loss),
5 Appendix
Approximate round trip times in milli-seconds:

Minimum = 0ms, Maximum = 0ms, Average = 0ms
113
Other Settings and Adjustments
> Performing an installation check

Installation check
(Maintenance and Setting → Installation check)
1 Basic Operations
 P. 25 Turning on the System for the First Time
> Adjusting Touch Screen

If the system does not respond when a screen button or key is pressed, perform
readjustment in the following steps.
1 With the power switch turned OFF, turn

Center of the screen

on the power switch while pressing the
center of the screen. “Touch Upper Left”
is displayed on the screen.
Square
2 Press the square button on the screen. button
3 Press the (1), (2), and (3) square buttons

in this order. “Push [YES] button” is
displayed, and a 15-second countdown
starts.
（1）
4 Before the countdown is complete, press

[Yes]. The adjustment will be completed,
（2）
and the [Start] screen is displayed a few （3）
4 Maintenance
seconds later.
Push [YES] button : 10

If you choose not to press [YES] before the end of
YES YES
countdown, the system returns to Step 2.
5 Appendix
114
> Checking Version Info
Press Help [?] → [Version Info.] to display
the metal detector model, serial number,
1 Basic Operations
version information of the software, and
details on options.
> Changing and Initializing Password
The password can be changed or initialized by following the steps below.
1 In the “Menu” screen, by selecting “Control Panel”  “Password Change”, “Password

Change” screen will be displayed. Tap [Next].

2 Select either “Change Password” or
“Initialize Password”.
After selection, tap [Next].
4 Maintenance
Changing the password
▼ Changing the password

3 Changing access level.
After selection, tap [Next].
5 Appendix
Selecting the Manager Level
115
4 Enter “Current password”. When the box is pressed, the keypad will be displayed.
Enter the password and press [OK].
1 Basic Operations
Password input screen
When [Next] is pressed, the screen

shown on the right is displayed. Enter a

new password two times.
Enter a password using 18 characters or less.

Only numbers, letters, or a combination of
numbers and letters can be used. Operation
can be done without setting any password.
When [Next] is pressed with a blank box, the

message "New Password is blank. Access
level can be changed without entering a
password." is displayed. Press [Yes].
When “Completing password change” is

displayed, press [Completed].
4 Maintenance
▼ Initializing the password

5 Select “Initialize Password”, select the
access level to initialize, and press [Yes].
5 Appendix
116
When the initialization is completed
successfully, the screen shown on the
right is displayed. Press [Completed].
1 Basic Operations
> Setting the Date and Time
1 When top area of the screen with date
and time is pressed, the input screen is
displayed.

2 Set Year, Month, and Day in the upper column, and Time in the lower column.
When the text box is pressed, the keypad is displayed. Enter a value and press
[OK].
Upper column:Year/Month/Day
Lower column:Hour:Minute:Second
4 Maintenance
Entering “Hour”
After entering values, press [OK] to finish
setting.
5 Appendix
117
> Setting the Language
The language can be changed using the following steps.
1 Basic Operations
1 Press “Language” in the “Menu” screen.

Or press “?” icon, and select [Language].
Setting to English display

2 Select the language and press [OK].
> Changing the Display Language

By registering the product names in two languages in advance, the display language can
be switched according to the needs of the user.
The display can be switched.
Registering product names in two languages. Displaying in the “Product list” screen.
* Access level 2 or higher is required to set.

4 Maintenance
1 In the “Menu” screen, select “Control

Panel”  “Region and Language” 
“Standard language”.
5 Appendix
118
2 Select “Standard language” and press
[OK].
1 Basic Operations
The display language is switched
depending on the settings of “Standard
language” and “Display language”.
The following table shows the example

when specifying Portuguese as [Disp
Type1] and English as [Disp Type2].
Setting of Standard
Auto Portuguese English
language
Setting of Language Portuguese English Portuguese English Portuguese English
Product Product Product Product Product Product
Display of Product Name Name Name name 2 name 2 Name
Name * Product Name is * The product name is switched between Product
always displayed. Name and Product name 2.
User User User User
User Name User Name
Display of User Name Name 2 Name 2 Name 2

Name * User Name is always * The user name is switched between User
displayed. Name and User Name 2.
▪ When starting up, the display language is the one specified as standard language.When
specifying the standard language setting to “Auto”, the display language is the one specified
as the display language.
▪ Specify the product name to be displayed in either of the following methods:
(1) Disp Type1 and Disp Type2 in the “Enter Product Information” screen
 P. 31 Registering a New product – Step 3
(2) Product Name and Product name2 in the “Product information” screen
4 Maintenance
 P. 41 Product information
▪ Specify User Name (or User Name 2) with the user master using the QUICCA tool.
5 Appendix
119
■ Switching display language on Product list
▪ When pressing [Fn] button on the lower right of the screen while the product list is
displayed in the language specified in [Product Name], [Product name change]
appears on top of the submenu list. Press [Product name change] to display the
1 Basic Operations
names in the language specified in [Product name 2]. To display the product names in
the language specified in [Product Name], follow the same procedure to switch the
language from [Product Name 2] to [Product name].
Switching display language (for product names)
▪ This procedure to switch the display language only applies to the Product list screens.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
120
> Setting Conveyor Speed
This is to set the conveyor speed of the main unit and rejector to be connected.
1 Basic Operations
Set main conveyor
(Maintenance and Setting  Unit/connected device set.  Conveyor  Set main
conveyor speed)
Setting
Name Description
(Default: _)
Main Conveyor 39 m/min Set the conveyor speed of metal detector to all
Speed*3 (5 to 91) products at a common value.
Main conveyor 39 m/min Sets the conveyor speed at higher side according to
speed (High)*1 (5 to 91) each product.
Main conveyor 39 m/min Sets the conveyor speed at lower side according to
speed (Low)*2 (5 to 91) each product.
*1 and *2 can be set when the conveyor speed is 2nd. *3 can be set when the speed is
fixed.
RJ conveyor settings

(Maintenance and Setting  Unit/connected device set.  Conveyor  RJ conveyor
spd. settings)
Setting
Name Description
(Default: _)
RJ Conveyor 39 m/min
Sets RJ conveyor speed.
Speed*1 (5 to 91)
Sets RJ conveyor speed at higher side.
Speed (High)*2 (5 to 91)
Sets RJ conveyor speed at lower side.
Speed (Low)*3 (5 to 91)
4 Maintenance
*1 and *2 can be set when the conveyor speed is 2nd. *3 can be set when the speed is
fixed.
5 Appendix
121
> Statistics Control
This is to make detailed settings for the statistics.
1 Basic Operations
Basic Statistics Setting

(Stats Control  Basic Statistics Setting)
Setting
Name Description
(Default: _)
Selects statistical process when product count
reaches 1 million
Does not display alarm even when product
count reaches 1 million
The display count is cleared to 0 and the

count re-starts. Select “None” when the count
No
display is used without requiring all the
statistical data. As a result, it is possible to
use the count display continuously without
clearing the count.
No Displays alarm “A006: STAT OVERFLOW”

Statistics Overflow when product count reaches 1 million
Yes
The measurements for products exceeding 1
million are not included in the statistics until

the statistics are cleared. Select “Yes” when
all the statistical data are required. To obtain
Yes correct total statistics, always clear the
statistical data periodically before the count
reaches 1 million.
When the “A006 alarm” is displayed, print the
total statistical data, and clear the data. The
system will then start saving the data for
statistics including total statistics again.
Specifies whether to clear the current statistics when
4 Maintenance
the product is changed.

Product Change No The statistics are not cleared when the
No
Stats Clear Yes product is changed.
The current statistics are cleared when the
Yes
product is changed.
If "Yes" is set, statistics data is saved to USB when
statistics are cleared.
USB Stats Save At No Statistics data is not saved to USB when statistics are
Stats Clear Yes cleared from "Serial", "Ethernet", or "General I/O". It
5 Appendix
cannot be used with "Smart Guide" or "Product

Change Stats Clear".
122
> Security and Rules
This is to set items to be prohibited or allowed regarding the operation.
1 Basic Operations
Policy settings list
(Maintenance and Setting  Security and rules  Policy settings list)
Setting
Name Description
(Default: _)
Change Parameter Enable Used to disable to change parameters during
(ope.) Disable operation.
Enable
Chg. Prod. (ope.) Used to disable to change product during operation.
Disable
Selects metal detector conveyor operation at error
Does not stop conveyor. Products are
Nonstop rejected in the direction set at the
Processing Error Nonstop
Stop “ALARM direction” column on the “RJ
direction settings” screen.
Stop Stops conveyor.
Selects conveyor operation of metal detector for NG

products.
This setting is given priority over the “RJ direction
settings” when this setting is “Stop”. The setting in the
“RJ direction settings” screen is given priority when
this is set to “Non Stop”.
Note: If the “NG Product” parameter is set to “Stop”,
the evaluation output is held even when the
Nonstop conveyor is stopped by NG product evaluation.
NG Product* The evaluation output is released when the
Stop
[Stop] button is pressed to reset. “Stop" setting
for RJ direction parameter at the “RJ Direction
Setting” screen works in the same manner.
4 Maintenance
When it is set to “Stop”, the product may flow

downstream on the conveyor without stopping.
Does not stop conveyor. The rejector is
Nonstop
used to reject unacceptable products.
Stop Stops conveyor. The rejector is not used.
Selects the conveyor operation when the network
Stop upon communication alarm occurs.
Nonstop
communication
Stop Non-stop Does not stop conveyor.
alarming
Stops conveyor.
5 Appendix
Stop
123
Setting
Name Description
(Default: _)
Specifies the evaluation result when an evaluation
timing alarm occurs.
1 Basic Operations
Evaluation timing NG
NG Determines the evaluation result NG (fail).
alarm Dbl. Prod
Dbl. Determines the evaluation result Dbl. Prod.
Prod (double product).
The errors/alarms cannot be
None released at once by pressing the
Error/Alarm Batch None [Stop] button.
Release [Stop] button The errors/alarms can be released
[Stop] button at once by pressing the [Stop]
button.
Does not display the evaluation
No value in the “General” and
Evaluation value No “Sensitivity Adjustment” screens.
display Yes Displays the evaluation value in
Yes the “General” and “Sensitivity
Adjustment” screens.
Sets whether to display the screen for selecting
whether to display the Confirmation at installation

At start/inst check No screen at system startup.
display Yes
No Do not display
Yes Display
The access level at power-on can be configured.
Auto The access level when the power is next
turned on depends on the access level when
the power was last turned off.
Access level at start Auto
Access level at Access level at
of work 1a power-off next power-on
4 Maintenance
1a 1a
1b, 2 1b
1a The access level at power-on is 1a.

This parameter is used to set a release limitation by a
(Max. password when releasing an alarm. The input of a
Alarm Reset
alphabetical18 password set here can release an alarm. An
Password
characters) erroneous input of a password cannot release the
password.
5 Appendix
124
Setting
Name Description
(Default: _)
You are required to enter a password to
Error/alarm
Subject to set Error/alarm release errors and alarms.
1 Basic Operations
password Error You are required to enter a password to
Error
release errors.
Reports the following evaluation results and alarms by
generating a sound.
▪ MDNG
▪ Cnv. NG (Dbl. prod. NG)
No ▪ EXNG
NG alarm sound ▪ EXNG2
Yes
▪ Dbl. prod.alarm (A501)
▪ Evaluation timing alarm (A604,A605)
No Sound is turned off
Yes Reports NG by sound.
Auto Logoff Time automatically changes the access
level to 1a if the inspection system is not operated for
Auto Logoff Time 0 to 60 (Min.) a certain period of time after switching to the manager
level (Access level 2). If 0 is set, the auto log-off time

becomes invalid.
* “NG Product” is displayed when “Common” is specified for “NG product process
(operation)”.
Common/By product
(Maintenance and Setting  Security and rules  Common/By product)
Setting
Name Description
(Default: _)
Specifies settings related to the process of the NG (failed)
products.
4 Maintenance
Specifies the action to process the NG (failed)

NG product products as the common settings.
Common
process Common Specifies either “Stop” or “Nonstop” in “NG
By product
(operation) product process” from the “Policy Setting List”
screen.
By Specifies an option how to process NG (failed)
product products for each product.
5 Appendix
125
> Specifying the installation check settings
Installation check setting
(Maintenance and Setting  Installation check  Installation check setting)
1 Basic Operations
Setting
Name Description
(Default: _)
Sets whether to display the screen for selecting
whether to display the Confirmation at installation
At start/inst check No screen at system startup.
display Yes
No Do not display
Yes Display
This records whether "Cautions for safety" on the

Check cautions for Unfinished
Confirmation at installation screen has been
safety Finished
performed. This parameter cannot be changed.
This records whether "Handling caution 1" on the
Check handling Unfinished
caution 1 Finished
This records whether "Handling caution 2" on the
Check handling Unfinished
caution 2 Finished
This records whether "Installation precaution" on the

Check installation Unfinished
precaution Finished
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
126
> Other Functions
In the “Menu” screen, select “Maint. and Setting”  “Functions”.
Specify the settings for each of the functions as required by referring to the table below.
1 Basic Operations
■ Photocell monitoring
(Maintenance and Setting  Functions  Photocell monitoring)
Setting
Name Description
(Default: _)
Inputs time that photosensor detects error status.
The error is generated when the interrupted time of
the photo sensor exceeds the set time. The default is
7s
Photocell Error Time 7 seconds which can be shortened if that is too long.
(1 to 9s)
However, do not set the time shorter than the product
interrupt time, because an error will occur each time
a product passes.
Set how to release the following photocell errors.
Normally, a photocell error is automatically released
when the cause is improved. Set “Manual” when you
operate the equipment by entering the release
password.

▪ RJ photocell error E352, A352
Clear photo Auto ▪ Photocell error E511
tran/recverror Manual A photocell error is automatically released
when the cause is improved. You can
Auto release the error manually. However, the
photocell error persists if the cause of the
error is not improved.
When you find a photocell error, clear the
Manual
cause and press the [//Reset] button.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
127
■ Smart Guide setting
(Maintenance and Setting  Functions  Smart Guide)
Setting
Name Description
1 Basic Operations
(Default: _)
Smart guide is the function that displays operation
instructions on the screen to operate the metal
No detector properly.
Smart guide
Standard
No Not use smart guide.
Standard Use smart guide.
Displays the [Register new product] button in the
“Phase 2” screen when using smart guide.
No
Does not display the [Register new
1a No
Phase 2: Prod Reg. product] button.
1b
Displays the [Register new product]
2
1a to 2 button when the access level is equal to
or higher than the specified level.
Displays the [Adjust detection sensitivity] button in
the “Phase 2” screen when using smart guide.
No
Does not display the [Adjust detection
Phase 2: Detect. 1a No
sensitivity] button.
Sense. Adj. 1b
Displays the [Adjust detection sensitivity]
2
1a to 2 button when the access level is equal to
or higher than the specified level.
Displays the [Ope. Chk at prod.] button in the “Phase
4” screen when using smart guide.
No
Does not display the [Ope. Chk at prod.]
Phase 4: Ope. Chk 1a No
button.
at prod. 1b
Displays the [Ope. Chk at prod.] button
2
1a to 2 when the access level is equal to or
higher than the specified level.
4 Maintenance
Eva/RJ Confirmation No If "Yes" is set, tap [Others] button to display

Details Yes evaluation/rejection results of smart guide.
5 Appendix
128
■ Full detection
(Maintenance and Setting  Functions  Full detection)
Setting
Name Description
1 Basic Operations
(Default: _)
This sets either pass or NG products to be detected as
full when using the “Full Detection” function.
This is enabled only when “FULL” is set at “Input port”
OK and “Output port” in the “I/O Setting” screen.
BoxFull Target
NG Stops conveyor when pass product
OK
count reaches set full count.
Stops conveyor when NG product count
NG
reaches set full count.
Set the time from the full detection signal on to the
Box full monitoring 5 seconds occurrence of an alarm. Set the time so that no
time (1 to 10 seconds) product overflows from the NG box before an alarm
occurs.
An alarm occurs at full detection and
gives a warning. An error occurs and
stops the conveyor when a box-full
Error/alarm
quantity of products flows in the box.

Error/alarm Set 0 to 9998 for box-full quantity to
At full detect generate an error.
Alarm
An alarm occurs and stops the conveyor
at full detection. An error does not occur
Alarm
even when the box-full quantity of
products flows in the box.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
129
Full Detection Input and Output
When boxes are installed at the product classification outlet, products may not be
correctly classified or products may overflow if the boxes become full. Full detection I/O
avoids this problem.
1 Basic Operations
[1] [2]
外部 (ボックス)
External (box) 重量選別機
Metal detector 外部External
(パトライト)
(Warning light)
Full count start

満杯個数カウント開始
Full detect input

満杯検出入力
満杯検出出力
Full detect output
“A070 Box FULL” display
「A070 ボックス FULL」表示
5s 1s 個数カウントリセット
Count reset alarm
アラーム表示解除
display released
Conveyor Start/ 運転
Start
Stop status /停止状態停止
コンベア運転 Stop
［ストップ］ボタン後の
Operation restart by pressing
[Start] button
［スタート］ボタンで再運転
[1] Detection full input (signal name: FULL)

This input is for detecting the full status. When this input is continuously ON for more
than 5 seconds, the Indicator displays the “A070 Box Full” alarm to turn the Full
detection output to ON and full counting starts. When the count reaches the set full
count (except when it is set to 0 or 9999), the metal detector conveyors will forcibly be
stopped. When Full Count reaches the set condition, the conveyor stops and
simultaneously displays the alarm. When Full Count does not reach the set condition,
4 Maintenance
the conveyor does not stop.

The input signal logic can be reversed by changing the input logic setting.
[2] Detection full output (Signal name: FULL)

This output goes ON when the Full detection input is ON for 5 seconds. It goes OFF
when the Full detection input is OFF.
5 Appendix
130
■ Product check setting
(Maintenance and Setting  Functions  Product check setting)
Setting
Name Description
1 Basic Operations
(Default: _)
Enables or disables the product check function.
The product check function is used to correct the
Product Check Yes phases of inspected products during metal
Function No contaminant inspection.
“Product check setting” is displayed on the Product
settings screen when this parameter is set to “Yes”.
Set the processing at the end of product check.
Stop Stop Stops the operation.
Product Check
Operation Operation Proceeds with production.
Finish Proc.
Stop Abnormal Stop Stops the operation if an error
Abnormal occurs.
■ NGBox door monitoring time

(Maintenance and Setting  Functions  Electronic locked NGBox setting)

Setting
Name Description
(Default: _)
This function is used to notify the alarm when the
unacceptable-product box that is installed to the
rejector is opened for the specified time or longer.
Yes
NGBox Lock Alarm can be released by the operation on the
No
screen. In addition, closing all of the
unacceptable-product boxes to be installed
automatically releases alarm.
This parameter is used to set a time for monitoring
5 seconds the open status of an NG reception box. An A072
NGBox Monitor Time
4 Maintenance
(1 to 30) NGBox Open alarm occurs when the open status
continues for more than the specified time.
Alarm Alarm An alarm occurs at NGBox open.
At NGBox open
Error Error An error occurs at NGBox open.
5 Appendix
131
■ RJ check (optional)
(Maintenance and Setting  Functions  RJ Check Setting)
Setting
Name Description
1 Basic Operations
(Default: _)
Set how to generate the following RJ check error.
▪ Rejector operation error E015, A015
▪ OK not passed E031, A031
▪ NG product passed E032, A032
▪ NG product rejection error E033, A033
▪ OK product rejected E034, A034
▪ NG product rejection error E035, A035
▪ Non-evaluation rejecting E036, A036

▪ RJ3 acceptance path conveyance fail E081, A081
▪ Detection of uninspected prod. in RJ3 accept. path
E083, A083
▪ RJ1 reject path sort failure E084, A084
▪ Detection of uninspected prod. in RJ1 reject path
E086, A086

Alarm ▪ RJ5 reject path sort failure E088, A088
At RJ check error
Error ▪ Detection of uninspected prod. in RJ5 reject path
E089, A089
▪ Detection of uninspected prod. in RJ3 reject path
E283, A283
4 Maintenance

E286, A286
E289, A289
▪ Excess product length detected by sorter E290,
A290
Alarm An alarm occurs at RJ check error.
5 Appendix
Error An error occurs at RJ check error.
132
> Setting Screen Brightness and Key Touch Operation
This is to specify the screen brightness, back light off, and key touch operation.
1 Basic Operations
Display settings
(Control Panel  Display settings)
Setting
Name Description
(Default: _)
4, 3, 2, 1, 0, -1, Adjusts back light brightness.
Screen brightness
-2, -3, -4 The default “4” is the brightest setting.
Sets the time to turn off the screen light.
When it is set to 0, the screen will never turn off.
Back light out 0 to 30 (min)
To re-display the screen, touch the screen or press
the Home button.
Key touch operation

(Control Panel  Key touch operation)
Setting
Name Description
(Default: _)
ON Sets ON/OFF of the touch sound at key/screen

Key Touch Sound
OFF operation.
Specify the keyboard layout.
Displays the QWERTY screen. Note
Auto that the ABCDEF screen is displayed
Auto
Keyboard Layout QWERTY if the screen display language is
ABCDEF Japanese.
QWERTY Displays the QWERTY screen.
ABCDEF Displays the ABCDEF screen.
4 Maintenance
QWERTY screen ABCDEF screen

5 Appendix
133
> Entering Device Information
Enters the information to specify each device.
1 Basic Operations
Device Information settings

(Maint. and Setting  Device Information  Device Information settings)
Setting
Name Description
(Default: _)
0000
Line Name (up to 4 Specifies “Line Name” when needed.
characters)
00
Sub-number Specifies “Sub-number” when needed.

(00 to 99)
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
134
Options and Peripheral Devices
> Setting Signal Tower and Buzzer (option)

If the optional signal tower or buzzer is installed, set it in the following steps.
1 Basic Operations
1 Select the “Menu” screen  “Maint. and Setting”  “Unit/connected device set.” 
“Signal tower / Buzzer”  “Signal tower common Set.”
2 In the “Signal tower common Set.” screen,
set Signal Tower to “Yes”. Set the number
of lights and the colors of the lights by
referring to the table below.

Setting
Name Description
(Default: _)
No
Signal Tower Sets the presence of the signal tower or buzzer.
Yes
3 Sets the number of lamps to 3.
Number of Lights
(0 to 3) For the buzzer, set Number of Lamps to 3.
Red
(Red, Yellow,
4 Maintenance
One Sets the color of the 1st lamp of the signal tower .
Green, Blue,
White)
Yellow
(Red, Yellow,
Two Sets the color of the 2nd lamp of the signal tower .
Green, Blue,
White)
Green
(Red, Yellow,
Three Sets the color of the 3rd lamp of the signal tower.
Green, Blue,
5 Appendix
White)
135
Resetting the signal tower
Disabling buzzer sound only

Press the sound button at the top of the screen.
(lamps still illuminate)
1 Basic Operations
Disabling buzzer sound and lamps Press the [//] button at the top of the screen.
3 Select the target item in the “Sig. tower

settings” screen and press [Input]. Set
the Op method and Op Time by referring
to the table below.
Event
When the “Event” box is pressed, the input screen is displayed.
Event Operation timing Pulse Hold 1 Hold 2 Standard

None Disables the set event. – – – –
Stop Conveyor stopped Disable Disable Disable Enable
Operation Conveyor ON Disable Disable Disable Enable

Ope.Check Operation check Disable Disable Disable Enable
Error Error occurred Disable Disable Disable Enable
RJ Alarm Alarm occurrs and product is
Disable Disable Disable Enable
Direction discharged in alarm direction.
OK OK evaluation Enable Enable Enable Disable
All NG NG evaluation Enable Enable Enable Disable
MDNG MDNG occurred Enable Enable Enable Disable
Conveyor NG D-Prod. evaluation or length
Enable Enable Enable Disable
(D-Prod. etc) exceeded
4 Maintenance
External NG External NG evaluation Enable Enable Enable Disable

External NG 2 External NG 2 evaluation Enable Enable Enable Disable
According to the setting of OUTP1
OUTP1 Arbitrary Arbitrary Arbitrary Arbitrary
of general I/O output
5 Appendix
For OUTP1 to 3, the operating method and operating time that are set on the "IO setting"
screen are used.
136
The settings specified in OUTP1 to OUTP3 of general I/O output can be used as a signal
tower event. OUTP1 to OUTP3 can be set in the I/O Output screen
Available events are listed below.
1 Basic Operations
I/O output signal
RJ Alarm Direction
Measurable
RJ Check Error Output
Printer Paper Out Alarm
Full Detection
Conveyor Error Output
Serial Communication
Alarm
USB Memory-Related
Alarm
READY
NGBOX OPEN RJ1
NGBOX OPEN RJ2
NGBOX OPEN RJ4

NGBOX OPEN RJ5
Op method
When the “Op method” box is pressed, the input screen is displayed.
Op method Operation
Standard Operates as described in the event.
Pulse Operates during the Op Time.
Hold 1 Operates until the end of evaluation of the next product. 4 Maintenance
Hold 2 Operates until the Reset button on the screen is pressed to reset.
5 Appendix
137
Illumination method
When the level box of the tower is pressed, the input screen is displayed.
Illumination method Operation

1 Basic Operations
Off Turns it off.

No change Does not affect the light.
On Turns it on.
Blink 1 Repeats short blinks.
Blink 2 Repeats long blinks.
Blink 3 Repeats short blinks with a break in between sets.
Beep method
When the top level box of the tower is pressed, the input screen is displayed.
Beep method Operation

Mute Turns off the sound.
No change Does not affect the beep sound.
Beep 1 Generates short beeps.
Beep 2 Generates long beeps.
Op Time
When the “Op Time” text box is pressed,
the input screen is displayed.
This is the time for which the signal tower
is operated when [Op method] is set to
[Pulse].
Op Time input screen

4 Maintenance
■ Adding a new event

To add a new event, select a blank line
as shown right, and press the [Input]
button.
5 Appendix
Selecting a blank event
138
■ Sequence change
Sets the lamp to highlight (give preference) at the upper tier.
1 Basic Operations
1 Press [Seq. chg] to set the lamp to
highlight (give preference) in an earlier
number.
(Example) Selecting the 2nd event
2 When the up arrow button in the right end

of the screen is pressed, the selected
event moves to the top.

Moves to the top
■ Delete event
Select the event and press the [Delete] button at the bottom of the screen.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
139
> Setting a Printer (option)
This section describes the printer settings when the optional printer is installed.
1 Basic Operations
■ Setting a printer to use

Printer settings
(Menu  Maint. and Setting  Unit/connected device set.  Printer  Printer
settings)
Setting
Name Description
(Default: _)
Sets to disable or enable Data Printer or
commercially used ones.

Disable
Disable Not used
Excl. Use
Printer Excl. Use Optional Data Printer used
General 1
General 2 Commercially available printer used.
General 1,
For the model that can be used,
General 2
consult Anritsu.
■ Selecting product to print out

1 In the "Menu" screen, select "USB

memory/printer"  "Output to printer”,
and press "Set”.
2 Select the products (all or one product) to

print out.
4 Maintenance
To select only one product, touch the text

box to display the Product List screen.
Select the product and press [OK].
In the right screen, press [Printout] to
start printing.
To feed paper without printing, press [Feed].

5 Appendix
140
■ Settings other than products to print out
(Menu  Maint. and Setting  Unit/connected device set.  Printer  Printer output
settings)
1 Basic Operations
Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
Normal
Print Direction Sets the print direction.
Reverse
Selects print contents for individual products.
* If "All" or "Only NG" is specified, be sure to stop
the conveyor before turning off the system. If you
turn off the system without stopping the conveyor,
individual printing might not be performed
correctly.
No
No Does not print individual data.
All
Individual Print Prints evaluation results for all
Only NG All
products.
MDNG
Prints the evaluation results for NG
products. NG products include
Only NG
MDNG, EXNG and Dbl. Prod

products.
Prints evaluation results only for
MDNG
MDNG products.
Sets ON/OFF for the function that automatically
Print at Operation No prints operation check results at the end of an
Check End Yes operation check.
Operation Check …(Eva/RJ Confirmation)
Displays evaluation result in numerical value.
No
Eval. print It can be used to determine whether the evaluation
Yes
limit is effective. 4 Maintenance
Selects individual print operation
Prints the operation start date and time and the
operation stop date and time. The date and time are
No also printed when a product is changed during
Start/Stop pr.
Yes operation.
* If “Individual Print” is set to “No”, no date and time
is printed even when “Start/Stop pr.” is set to
“Yes”.
No Selects whether to print the evaluation result of the
Check Mode Print
Yes product fed in the check mode.
5 Appendix
141
The print directions (Normal/Reverse) are as shown in the sample below.
1 Basic Operations
Normal Reverse
Paper feed direction

■ Print contents and format

The metal detector can print the following data with the optional printer installed.
Data Print contents

Statistics Data Total Statistics Printing
Individual Print
Individual Data Eval. print
Start/Stop print
Eva/RJ Confirmation Printing
Operation Check Data
Check Mode Print
4 Maintenance
For print samples, refer to the following.

5 Appendix
142
Total Statistics Printing
At Total Statistics Printing, the statistics data after statistics clear is printed when the
[Print] button is pressed.
The printed contents vary depending on the evaluation mode for each product.
1 Basic Operations
Statistics print example for Metal Checks 1, and Missing Check
Product No.
Statistics start time
P001=== G.TOTAL ======== Statistics end time
Start 2013-08-02 09:43
(Time when the first product was (Time when the last product
End 2013-08-02 09:45
measured after the statistics P. name ---- Snacks was measured.)
data was cleared.) Lot No. ---
OK 93.3% 28
MDNG 6.7% 2 EXNG and EXNG2 are not
EXNG 0.0% 0 printed if they are excluded
EXNG2 0.0% 0 from the statistics.
Dbl. Prod 0.0% 0
(OVF) 0.0% 0
(MDNG+EXNG) 0.0% 0 (MDNG+EXNG) is not printed
TOTAL COUNT 30 if both EXNG and EXNG2 are
======================== excluded from the statistics.

Statistics print example for Metal Checks 4
Product No.
Statistics start time P002=== G.TOTAL ========
Statistics end time
Start 2013-08-02 09:35
(Time when the first product was (Time when the last product
End 2013-08-02 09:36
measured after the statistics P. name ---- Snacks was measured.)
data was cleared.) Lot No. ---
MDNG 5 EXNG and EXNG2 are not
EXNG 0
printed if they are excluded
EXNG2 0
(OVF) 5 from the statistics.
========================
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
143
Individual Print
The printed contents vary depending on the “Individual Print”, “Eval. print”, and “Start/Stop
pr.” parameter settings.
If “Eval. print” is set to “Yes”, the evaluation value is printed if the evaluation result is “OK”
1 Basic Operations
or “MDNG”. If “Eval. print” is set to “No”, the evaluation value is not printed.
If “Start/Stop pr.” is set to “Yes”, the operation start date and time and the operation stop
date and time are printed. If “Start/Stop pr.” is set to “No”, the operation start date and
time and the operation stop date and time are not printed.
Individual printing when “Eval. print” is set to “No”

Product name
Product No.
No.001 Snacks Not printed if “Start/Stop pr.” is

Start date and time Start 2013-08-12 11:03:04 set to “No”.
Serial number 01 2013-08-12 11:03:08 OK products are not printed if

No.001 [OK ]
“Individual Print” is set to
02 2013-08-12 11:03:13
“MDNG” or “Only NG”.
No.001 [OK ]
03 2013-08-12 11:03:33
No.001 [MDNG ]
04 2013-08-12 11:03:41
No.001 [MDNG ]
05 2013-08-12 11:04:32
No.001 [EXNG ] EXNG products are not printed if

06 2013-08-12 11:04:36 “Individual Print” is set to “MDNG”.
No.001 [EXNG ]
07 2013-08-12 11:05:06 Double products are not printed if
No.001 [Dbl. Prod] “Individual Print” is set to “MDNG”.
08 2013-08-12 11:05:06
No.001 [OK ]
Evaluation result
End 2013-08-12 11:05:15
Stop date and time
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
144
Individual printing when “Eval. print” is set to “Yes”

Product name
Product No. Not printed if “Start/Stop pr.” is
No.001 Snacks
1 Basic Operations
Start date and time Start 2013-08-12 11:05:45 set to “No”.
Serial number 01 2013-08-12 11:05:51

No.001 [OK ]
Evaluation result ML1 ( 4.86/ 5.0)
ML2 ( 2.87/ 5.0)
ML3 ( 2.87/ 5.0) OK products are not printed if
ML4 ( 2.87/ 5.0) “Individual Print” is set to
02 2013-08-12 11:06:03 “MDNG” or “Only NG”.
No.001 [OK ]
Check metal contamination ML1 ( 4.82/ 5.0)
ML1: Evaluation value ML2 ( 2.52/ 5.0)
for ML1 side ML3 ( 2.52/ 5.0)
ML2: Evaluation value
ML4 ( 2.52/ 5.0)
03 2013-08-12 11:06:13
for ML2 side
No.001 [MDNG ]
ML3: Evaluation value
ML1 (11.17/ 5.0)
for ML3 side ML2 ( 2.08/ 5.0)
ML4: Evaluation value ML3 ( 2.08/ 5.0)
for ML4 side ML4 ( 2.08/ 5.0)
Check missing product 04 2013-08-12 11:06:18
ML1: Evaluation value No.001 [MDNG ]
for ML1 side Fe (11.25/ 5.0)

SUS ( 9.95/ 5.0)
05 2013-08-12 11:06:44
No.001 [EXNG ] EXNG products are not printed if
06 2013-08-12 11:06:48 “Individual Print” is set to “MDNG”.
No.001 [EXNG ]
07 2013-08-12 11:07:19 Double products are not printed if
No.001 [Dbl. Prod] “Individual Print” is set to “MDNG”.
08 2013-08-12 11:07:19
No.001 [OK ]
ML1 ( 4.90/ 5.0)
ML2 ( 2.58/ 5.0)
ML3 ( 2.58/ 5.0)
ML4 ( 2.58/ 5.0)
End 2013-08-12 11:07:25

4 Maintenance
Stop date and time

5 Appendix
145
Operation Check Print
(Eva.RJ Confirmation)
Product No. Product

======= Ope. check =======
1 Basic Operations
Access level of the user No.001 Snacks

who performed the 2013-08-02 09:47:44 Time when the Eval/RJ
Eval/RJ check Access Level 2 check was performed
Individual data Res. Ope. Chk. OK
Indicates the evaluation OK OK Pass/fail result of the
reference value and result for ML1 ( 4.87/ 5.0) Eval/RJ check
each evaluation. ML2 ( 3.08/ 5.0)
The evaluation reference can
be set by selecting “Menu”  ML3 ( 3.08/ 5.0)
“Operation Check”  “Eval. & ML4 ( 3.08/ 5.0)
RJ check settings”. MDNG(Fe) OK
The value on the left indicates ML1 ( OVF/ 5.0) Check metal contamination
the evaluation criteria, and the ML2 ( OVF/ 5.0) ML1: Evaluation value
value on the right indicates the ML3 ( 3.08/ 5.0) for ML1 side
actual evaluation result.
ML4 ( 3.08/ 5.0) ML2: Evaluation value
MDNG(SUS) OK for ML2 side
ML1 ( 5.98/ 5.0) ML3: Evaluation value
ML2 ( OVF/ 5.0) for ML3 side
Indicates the size of the test ML3 ( 3.08/ 5.0)
piece used for the operation ML4: Evaluation value
check.
ML4 ( 3.08/ 5.0)
for ML4 side
The test piece size can be Check missing product
specified by selecting “Menu”,
Test Piece
SIZE Fe φ 2.0 ML1: Evaluation value
“Operation Check”, and then
SIZE SUS φ 2.0 for ML1 side
“Evaluation & RJ check

settings”.
========================
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
146
Check Mode Print
The printed contents vary depending on the “Eval. print” parameter settings.
Individual printing when “Eval. print” is set to “Yes”
1 Basic Operations
Product No.
No.001 Check Mode
Start 2013-08-12 11:05:45 Time when shifting to the check
Evaluation result [OK ] mode screen.
ML1 ( 4.86/ 5.0)
ML2 ( 2.87/ 5.0)
ML3 ( 2.87/ 5.0)
ML4 ( 2.87/ 5.0) Check metal contamination
Individual data [MDNG ] ML1: Evaluation value for ML1 side
Indicates the evaluation ML1 (11.82/ 5.0) ML2: Evaluation value for ML2 side
reference value and result ML2 ( 2.52/ 5.0) ML3: Evaluation value for ML3 side
for each evaluation. ML3 ( 2.52/ 5.0)
ML4: Evaluation value for ML4 side
ML4 ( 2.52/ 5.0)
Check missing product
[MDNG ]
ML1 ( 5.17/ 5.0) ML1: Evaluation value for ML1 side
ML2 ( 2.08/ 5.0)
ML3 (22.08/ 5.0)
ML4 ( 2.08/ 5.0)
End 2013-08-12 11:07:25 Time when exiting the check
mode screen.

Individual printing when “Eval. print” is set to “No”
No.001 Check Mode

Start 2013-08-12 11:05:45
[OK ]
[MDNG ]
[MDNG ]
End 2013-08-12 11:07:25
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
147
> Setting Rejector
This is to make detailed settings for the rejector.
1 Basic Operations
Common set of RJ
(Maintenance and Setting  Unit/connected device set.  Rejector  Common set of
RJ)
Setting
Name Description
(Default: _)
25 m/min
RJ Conveyor Speed Sets the conveyor speed of the rejector.
(5 to 91)
This function detects product intervals which may

result in unstable rejection (detection distance:
between the back end of one product and the front
end of the following one) as RJ overcapacity, then let
No
RJ Capacity the faulty products discharged in the higher-priority
Yes
Exceeded NG direction for sure. If this function is used, the
* Read only
displayed NG count may not match the number of
faulty products discharged into the NG box, because
secure discharge is preferred. It can be used when
connected to the flipper or dropout rejector.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
148
RJ Direction Settings
(Maintenance and Setting  Unit/connected device set.  Rejector  RJ Direction
Settings)
1 Basic Operations
Setting
Name Description
(Default: _)
Automatically set by RJ model.
This sets the gate standby position during operation
to OK or NG.
This function is enabled when the RJ output type is
OK “Pulse” and it is ignored when the RJ output type is
No Prod. Dir. “Hold”.
NG
OK Set gate to RJ3 direction after T4 termination.
Set gate to RJ1 or RJ5 direction after T4
NG termination depending on gate standby
position parameter.
Stop, RJ1, RJ2,
OK Sets OK rejection direction.
RJ3, RJ4, RJ5
Stop, RJ1, RJ2, Sets MDNG rejection direction.
MDNG
RJ3, RJ4, RJ5 (when metal detector is installed)

Stop, RJ1, RJ2,
EXNG Sets EXNG rejection direction.
RJ3, RJ4, RJ5
Stop, RJ1, RJ2,
EXNG2 Sets EXNG2 rejection direction.
RJ3, RJ4, RJ5
Specifies the rejection direction when A605 (when
Stop, RJ1, RJ2, specifying “NG” for “Evaluation timing alarm”) or
ALARM
RJ3, RJ4, RJ5 A606 “Evaluation timing alarm” (when using rejector)
occurs.
Specifies the rejection direction when the interval of
Stop, RJ1, RJ2, each transfer between the products is short or A605
D-Prod.
RJ3, RJ4, RJ5 “Evaluation timing alarm” (when specifying “D-Prod”
4 Maintenance
for “Evaluation timing alarm”) occurs.

Rejects the products forcibly in the specified
direction under the following conditions.
RJ1,
▪ Before the start of rejection for normally evaluated
Forced RJ2, RJ3,
products after the start of running
RJ4, RJ5
▪ During FOCUS settings
▪ During auto-setting
5 Appendix
149
▪ The initial setting of the rejection direction varies depending on the connected rejector.
▪ When the rejection direction is set to Stop, the product may flow on the conveyor to the
1 Basic Operations
downstream without stopping.

▪ When selecting D-Prod., the two products transferred very closely on the conveyor are
regarded as a single product. Therefore, if metal-contained object is detected from one of
them, the other normal product is also evaluated as the NG (failed) product.
▪ The rejector stops when A606 “Evaluation timing alarm” (when not using the rejector) occurs.
■ Rejection direction
3-way classification (STD) (Top view)

RJ direction RJ direction
RJ5 RJ1
RJ3 RJ3
Flow RJ1 RJ5 Flow
5-way classification (option) (Top view)
RJ direction RJ direction
RJ5 RJ1
RJ4 RJ2
RJ3 RJ3
Flow RJ2 RJ4 Flow
RJ1 RJ5
2-way classification (STD)

Dropout (side view)
RJ direction
RJ3
Flow
4 Maintenance
RJ1
Air jet (top view)
RJ direction
RJ3
Flow
RJ1 Rejection direction
Set directions for each of the following: ALARM, MDNG, EXNG, EXNG2, DBL P.
5 Appendix
150
■ RJ test mode
The operations of the rejector can be checked.
▪ In this mode, evaluation and rejection are not performed when a normal product is fed through.
1 Basic Operations
▪ Be sure to stop the operation before using this feature.
1 Tap the [Start] button on the RJ direction

settings screen.
2 Select the "Above content
acknowledged" check box and then tap
[Operate].

3 The operation starts in RJ test mode.
4 Maintenance
4 Tap a button for the rejector whose

operation is to be checked, such as
[RJ1].
The rejector operates one second after

the button is tapped.
5 Appendix
151
152
5 Tap the [Stop] button to exit RJ test
mode.
1 Basic Operations 2 Advanced Operations 3 Installation and Connection 4 Maintenance 5 Appendix
> Adjusting the cross plate
Adjust the cross plate mounting position. If the cross plate mounting position is not correct,
products might not be passed through correctly, or the cross plate might hit or bump the
1 Basic Operations
conveyor belt, causing the conveyor belt to wear out.
1 Loosen the screw at part A to adjust the

gap between the cross plate and the
conveyor surface.
At this time, adjust the gap so that the
A
cross plate does not contact the
conveyor belt.
2 Loosen the screw at part B to adjust the

height of the cross plate.
At this time, adjust the cross plate height
so that it is the same as the conveyor
surface height.
B
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
153
> Adjusting the cross roller
Adjust the cross roller mounting position. If the cross roller mounting position is not
correct, products might not be passed through correctly, or the cross roller might hit or
1 Basic Operations
bump the conveyor belt, causing the conveyor belt to wear out.
1 Loosen the screw at part A to adjust the

gap between the cross roller and the
conveyor surface.
At this time, adjust the gap so that the
cross roller does not contact the
conveyor belt.
> Adjusting the product guide

Adjust the product guide mounting position. If the product guide mounting position is not
correct, the product guide might hit or bump the conveyor belt, causing the conveyor belt
to wear out.
1 Loosen the handle.
2 Slide the shaft to which the product guide is

attached to adjust the guide width so that it is
symmetric to the center of the conveyor belt.
The guide width adjustable range differs
4 Maintenance
depending on the model. Observe the

specified adjustable range.
3 Loosen the screws of the mounting bracket, and move the mounting bracket vertically
to adjust the height of the product guide.
At this time, adjust the product guide height so that the product guide does not contact
the conveyor belt.
5 Appendix
154
Other Useful Functions
> Using Smart Guide

The Smart Guide is a feature to help operators correctly operate the metal detector.
Follow the instructions on the screen to operate the equipment without omitting any steps
1 Basic Operations
or making mistakes. The colors of the buttons on the screen used to guide operations are
defined below.
Shows the operation to be performed at this or the next
Orange
stage.
Shows that the operation is complete or that you can return
Blue
to the previous stage.
Green The desired selection is available.
Gray This operation is not available.
The Smart Guide is not set in standard specification equipment at shipment. Enable the
setting according to the following procedure.
1 From the "Menu" screen, select "Maint.

and Setting" → "Functions" → "Smart
Guide setting", and tap [Input].
2 Select "Standard", and tap [OK].

When changing the setting, the default screen of the Smart Guide is displayed by
pressing the [Home] button. Follow the instructions on the screen to perform the settings.
The standard work flow for performing operations by using the Smart Guide is described
below.
1 Perform an inspection before starting work.

▪ Checking the contact area 4 Maintenance
Check that the metal detector does not come into contact with an upstream/downstream
conveyor or peripherals.
▪ Cleaning around the conveyor

Clean around the conveyor to enable correct inspection and equipment maintenance.
▪ Checking the conveyor belt conditions

If the belt is frayed, replace it.
5 Appendix
155
2 Turn the power on.
Press [Start], and follow the instructions
on the screen.

1 Basic Operations
P. 27 Turning On/Off Power

When the power is turned on after being
turned off after the previous production
finished or during the previous production,
the equipment determines whether to
continue the previous work.
3 Inspecting and checking before start of production

Perform the following operations according to the instructions on the screen.
▪ Selecting the access level

Tap [Select an access level] to perform
settings according to the work details as
required.
▪ Selecting the production date and shift

Tap [Select production date] and specify

the date on which production will be
performed and the production shift.
Select the production date and shift by using the Smart Guide. By selecting the production date
and shift, production can be performed based on the date, time, and user. Production
information can also be checked in the form of a daily report output according to the production
date and shift.
Tap "Select production date" on the initial screen of the Smart Guide and select the production
date and shift on the screen that opens. Select [No Shift] if you do not want to set a production
4 Maintenance
shift. Select [Test] if you want to perform a confirmation check before starting production.
▪ Inspection before starting production

Tap [Preprod. check] to display the
inspection items on the screen. Check
the items, and then tap [OK]. Tap [Next]
to proceed to product selection
5 Appendix
156
▪ Product selection
Tap [Switch the product.] to check and
select the target product, and tap [Prod.
Chg.] Check the product name, and then
1 Basic Operations
tap [Next].
To register a new product, tap [Register

new product.]
If the product has not been registered, [Next] cannot be selected. Check that all of the product
parameter settings and auto-settings have been completed.
4 Check the operation before production.
Tap [Next] on the screen on the right, and
press the [Start] button.
Follow the instructions on the screen to
feed an OK product and NG product (Fe
and SUS test pieces mixed) in this order.

Place the test piece on the top or side of
the product.
Metal detector
Test piece
Product
When using a test piece to check the metal detection sensitivity, be

4 Maintenance
Caution careful not to let the piece pass to the downstream equipment.
When the screen on the right appears,

the pre-production operation check is
completed. Tap [Next] to start production.
If an error screen appears after the

operation check, tap [Redo] to perform
5 Appendix
the check again.
157
5 Start production.
It is recommended to allow at least 10 minutes for the detection accuracy to stabilize after
turning on power before using the equipment.
1 Basic Operations
Remove the products on the conveyor before starting operation, and then start the conveyor.
6 Check the operation after production.

Press the [Stop] button, and tap [Stop
production] after the conveyor is stopped.
Tap [Next], and feed OK and NG

products following the same procedure
as the operation check before the start of
production.
When the screen on the right appears,

the post-production operation check is
complete.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
158
7 Perform post-production processing.
When continuing with production of other
products, tap [Proceed with the next
1 Basic Operations
prod] to return to "2. Preparation".
When finishing production, tap [Execute

end process.], and follow the instructions
on the screen to perform a
post-production inspection.
After the inspection, the screen on the
right is displayed.

Tap [Complete current process.]
Tap [Close] to exit.
4 Maintenance
8 Turn the power switch off, and perform cleaning.

▪ Clean the belt surface and underside.
▪ Clean the equipment.

5 Appendix
To forcibly terminate a process during an operation using the Smart Guide, refer to the following
section.
 P.163 Terminating a process forcibly
159
■ Displaying a daily report
Information about production performed by using the Smart Guide can be displayed on
the Smart Guide in the form of a daily report.
The screen can be switched to the "Daily Report" screen by tapping the [Daily Report]
1 Basic Operations
button at the bottom of the screen.

The daily report displays information about the production of the production shift selected
on the initial screen of the Smart Guide, performed on the production date selected on the
initial screen of the Smart Guide.
The screen on the right is an example of a
daily report that displays information about
the production of Shift 3 that was performed
on April 24.
▪ Even if [No Shift] or [Test] has been
selected, the information is handled in
the same way as if Shifts 1 to 3 were
selected and is displayed in the daily
report as the information of a single shift.
▪ [Start Time] is the time at which the

pre-production operation check using the
test piece (both Fe and SUS) is first

completed successfully.
▪ When the product is switched but

production is not performed, the product
is not recorded in the daily report.
(Example) No. 5 on the screen on the
right
The meanings of the symbols in the pre-production/post-production operation check

4 Maintenance
results displayed in the daily report are as follows:

Symbol Description
○ Operation check successful
× Operation check failed
Blank Not implemented
- Canceled (stopped)
* Forcibly terminated
5 Appendix
160
■ Selecting the daily report to display
The daily report to display on the daily report
screen can be selected by tapping the
[Report Sel.] button at the bottom of the
1 Basic Operations
"Daily Report" screen. Changing the daily
report to display on the daily report selection
screen does not change the production date
or shift selected on the initial screen of the
Smart Guide. The latest 200 daily reports
can be displayed.
■ Saving daily report data
The data of the daily report showing the information of the selected manufacture date and
manufacture unit can be saved to a USB flash drive by tapping the [Save to USB] button
on the bottom of the daily report screen. The daily report data is recorded in a file called
"HDR_△△.csv" in the HIST folder.
Data is recorded to the USB flash drive in CSV format in the following order, with each
item delimited by a comma.
Item Remarks

ID Code History Type [4]
No. Serial number of daily report data for production of the specified
manufacture unit performed on the specified manufacture date
Product Product No.
Manufacture Date Specified manufacture date YYYY/MM/DD
Manufacture Unit Specified manufacture unit
No manufacture unit :-
Manufacture unit 1 to 3 : 1 to 3
4 Maintenance
Test :0
Start Time Time at which pre-production operation check first completed
successfully YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM
End Time Time at which post-production operation check first completed
successfully YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM (0/00/00 00:00 in the case of a
forcible termination)
5 Appendix
161
Item Remarks
Pre-production Results of three most recent pre-production operation checks
Operation Check Not implemented :0
Results Canceled (stopped) :1
1 Basic Operations
Operation check successful :2

Operation check failed :3
Production forcibly terminated :4
Work forcibly terminated :5
Pre-production The name of the user who performed the pre-production operation
Operation Check User check (only available when the optional user management feature is
Name used)
Post-production Results of three most recent post-production operation checks
Operation Check The numbers have the same meaning as the pre-production operation
Results check results.
Post-production The name of the user who performed the post-production operation
Operation Check User check (only available when the optional user management feature is
Name used)
Prod Count Conveyed item count
OK OK product count
MDNG Metal NG count
D-Prod. Double product count

4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
162
■ Terminating a process forcibly
It is possible to terminate a work process carried out by using the Smart Guide in the
middle and return to production start process.
1 Basic Operations
1 Select [Others], and then [Terminate
process].
2 Tap [Yes] on the screen on the right to
return to the start screen.
Press the [Start] button to start
production with a new product.

▪ Users with the authority to perform forcible termination as specified in "Set Access Authority" can
forcibly terminate a work process.
▪ A work process can be forcibly terminated during Smart Guide operation as required. However, if
the conveyor is running, a message to prompt users to stop the conveyor before performing
forcible termination appears, and the screen is not changed.
▪ Statistics from the start of work to forcible termination are cleared once the screen is moved to
[1. Start process] in the Smart Guide and the production date and shift are selected.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
163
> Displaying Product List
When “Display product list” is pressed in the “Menu” screen, a list of the product names of
registered products are displayed.
1 Basic Operations
▪ The following marks are displayed to indicate the setting status of each product.
Mark Description
The inspection can be performed.

The minimum settings required for the inspection are completed.
Not registered.

The inspection cannot be performed since the product registration is not completed.
The auto-setting is not performed.
?
The inspection cannot be performed since the auto-setting is not performed.

The mode is set to conveyor mode, in which products are transferred without being
inspected.
!
The metal detection is not performed when “Yes” is specified for “MD conveyor
mode”.
For the products with “” or “?” displayed, perform inspection after product registration.
 P. 30 Registering a New Product

▪ By switching between 1 and 2 in [Display], the number of items displayed on a screen

can be changed (5 or 8 products).
4 Maintenance
5 products/screen 8 products/screen
▪ To change the product for production, select the product to change and press [Prod.
Chg.].
▪ The “Product list” is also displayed when the “Product” area is pressed in the “General”
screen.
5 Appendix
164
■ Switching the language of products
Select [Fn] → “Product name change” to switch the display language for products.
Set Disp Type1 and Disp Type2 in the “Enter Product Information” screen previously. Or
set Product Name and Product name2 in the “Product information” screen.
1 Basic Operations
> Copying and Deleting Registered Product
■ Copying a registered product to another product number
1 Select the product to copy from the
product list screen.
2 Press the [Fn] button at the lower right of

the screen, and select “Copy”.
3 Select the product number of the

destination.
4 Press the [Fn] button at the lower right of

the screen and press “Paste”.
■ Deleting from Product Table screen

1 Select the product to delete. 4 Maintenance
2 Press the [Fn] button and press “Delete”. When the “Confirm delete” screen is
displayed, press [Yes].
5 Appendix
165
> Clearing Statistics
1 Select “Others”  “Clear Stats.”
1 Basic Operations
2 When [Yes] is pressed, only the statistics

related to the currently selected product
are cleared.
To clear the statistics of all the recorded

products, select “Clear all product Stats.”
and press [Yes].
The statistics of all products cannot be

cleared from the screen or IO during
operation.
> Setting All Products

This feature is used when specifying parameters of all products at once.
This feature improves the parameter setting efficiency when there are a lot of registered
products.
1 Open the menu screen, and select “Fn”

 “All prod setting” on the bottom right of
the screen.
4 Maintenance
Select [Yes] when the confirmation dialog

box appears to start the all product
settings.
2 The “All prod setting” appears on the top

of the screen.
5 Appendix
166
3 Open the screen that contains the
parameter to be set for all products, enter
the value to be changed, and then press
[OK].
1 Basic Operations
Example: Auto-Limit count
4 Press [//] (Exit) button on the top of the

screen.
Select [Yes] when the confirmation dialog
box appears to notify the completion of
all product setting.
The processing to apply the changed

parameter to all the products starts.
This processing takes a while. Do not turn the power off until the processing
completes.

5 The setting screen is displayed when the all product setting completes.
> Customizing the Items Displayed in Submenu

The submenus displayed by pressing a button on the bottom of the “Home” screen can be
customized. This feature is used to reduce the items displayed on the submenu.
* The customizable submenus are

surrounded by a red border.
4 Maintenance
The items on the submenu that can be

customized
5 Appendix
167
1 Select “Menu”, “Control Panel”, and then
“Home display settings”, and then select
the screen or menu to be customized.
1 Basic Operations
Example: When customizing

“Home screen disp. sel.”
Customizing the display

Menu Description
Home screen disp. sel. Selects the screen displayed as the home screen.
Ope. check menu sel. Selects the "General" screen and items displayed on the
Prod. control menu sel. submenus of the "General" screen.
Set/Adj menu sel.

"Others" operation menu Selects the items displayed on the "Others" submenu of the
selection "Basic display" screen opened by tapping the [Others] button.
2 Select the item to be hidden, press [Delete] and then [Yes].
Example: When hiding “Statis”

4 Maintenance
The text of “Statis” is deleted and

becomes “-” as shown on the right screen,
and “Statis” disappears from the submenu
in the “Home” screen.
5 Appendix
168
■ Restoring items deleted from the display targets
1 Open the display selection screen to
which you want to restore display items.
1 Basic Operations
2 Select the blank at the bottom of the list,
and tap [Input]. Select the items to be
restored to the submenu on the displayed
menu selection screen, and tap [OK].
The deleted items are displayed.

To display "Printer output"
When selecting the home screen, a
screen image appears when selecting
[Input]. The screen can be switched by
using the < and > buttons.
The currently displayed screen can be

selected as the home screen by tapping
[Back].
To display "Statistics"

“Smart guide” in the “Home” screen cannot be customized.
> Using Conveyor Mode

If you do not perform metal detection by product, set “MD Conveyor mode” to “Yes”.
In the conveyor mode, the metal detection level bar blinks yellow.
Setting the conveyor mode

1 From the “Menu” screen, select “Adjust
4 Maintenance
registered products”  “Product settings”

 “Conveyor mode”.
2 Set “MD Conveyor Mode” to “Yes” and

tap [OK].
The conveyor operates when the Start

button is pressed, and it stops when the
Stop button is pressed.
5 Appendix
In the MD conveyor mode, be careful that products are fed downstream without checking metal
contamination or missing products.
169
> Viewing History
When “History” is pressed in the “Menu” screen, past equipment state and production
state are displayed.
1 Basic Operations
Up to 1000 past events can be recorded, such as occurrences of NG products and

operation histories.
Select the target item and press [Set].

Viewing operation history

■ Alarm occurrence status
The types and numbers of errors or alarms that have occurred are listed. Select an error
or alarm and tap [Date/Time] to narrow down the list based on the event that caused the
selected error or alarm and display the operation history. The list of occurrence dates can
also be checked.
The number displayed on this screen is the result of counting the events in the operating
history.
Please note that this number might differ from the number recorded in the alarm history.
■ Ope. history
The operation history is displayed chronologically. The events shown in the operation
history include power-on, access level change, alarm occurrence and clearance, product
change, and other items. Select one of the events and tap [Info] to display a narrowed
down history.
Tap [Expanded] to cancel the narrowed-down display.
4 Maintenance
■ Param. History
The target product No., parameter type, and details of change appear chronologically
every time a parameter is changed.
■ NG history
The NG occurrence history including the product name and details is displayed
chronologically. When saving the history in USB memory, tap [Save to USB memory].
5 Appendix
170
■ Alarm History
Histories of error and alarm occurrences are displayed in chronological order. “No.” shows
the target product number, and “Details” shows the error code and error details. Tap the
[Info] button to show details of any errors. Note that some errors or alarms are not
1 Basic Operations
recorded on this screen, such as a double product.
An example of "History details"
for Error History
■ Operation Check History

Implementation status of Eva/RJ Check is displayed in chronological order.

■ Saving history
To save data, press [Save], select the target
data (Operation History / Parameter History /
NG History / Operation Check History /
Alarm History), target products (all or one
product), and output range (all data or past
24 hours), and press “Save”.
Saving operation check history to USB
■ Number of items that can be saved

4 Maintenance
Up to 1000 items can be displayed for all cases. If this is exceeded, the oldest items will
be deleted first.
■ Clearing history
For “NG History” and “Operation Check History”, all data can be cleared by pressing the
[Fn] button at the bottom right of the screen.
5 Appendix
171
> Setting Access Level By Function
Unexpected parameter changes can be prevented by setting an access level for each
function. It is also possible to limit the operations according to the access level.
1 Basic Operations
1 In the “Menu” screen, select “Maint. and

Setting”  “Security and rules”  “Set
Access Authority” to open the screen
shown on the right.
2 The available access levels for each function are displayed.

To change an access level, select the target function and press [Input] to display the
setting screen.
3 Select the access rights to the lowest

level. Press [OK] to complete setting.
The description above is an example of settings for “Product Registration”.

When “1b” is set, operators of Level 1b and Level 2 will be allowed to access.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
172
The table below shows the items that can be set.
Item Description
Operate/Stop Limits the operation to operate/stop the equipment.
1 Basic Operations
Chg Prod Limits the operation to change the product.
Detect-lvl Chg. Limits the operation to change the detection limit parameters.
Limits the operation for performance check.
Ope. Check
Target: Eva/RJ confirmation
Limits the operations to register the products and to change
Prod Reg.
parameters of the products.
Clear Statistics Limits the operation to clear the statistics.
Limits the operation to change the parameters related to basic
Maintenance
operations of the equipment.
NG stop authority Limits the operation to release the NG stop state.
Forcible Limits the operation to stop the operation according to the smart
termination guide halfway through.
Limits the operation for lot number change.
It is enabled only on the following screens.
Lot No. Change • "Parameter adjustment screen" that can be selected from the
General screen

• Statis screen
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
173
> Using Check Mode
By using Check Mode, metal contamination/missing detection can be done separately
from nomal operation. This is used to recheck NG products.
1 Basic Operations
The equipment operation in check mode is described below.

▪ Can be used whenever needed, irrespective of steps set by Smart Guide.
▪ The confirmed results are not included in the statistics or history.
▪ The rejection directions are same as set for normal operation.
1 Select [Adjust sensitivity.] on the "Basic

display" screen.
2 Press [Start] button and feed the product.

Tap [Back] to finish Check Mode and
return to the normal screen.

4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
174
> Registering Products Using Other Auto Setting Methods
Use this when measuring a product to which auto settings have been applied (the
properties are already known) or when changing a sensitivity mode determined by the full
1 Basic Operations
automatic method.
■ Differences from the Full-auto method (recommended)

The Full-auto (recommended) method actually measures the master product and
automatically evaluates the product properties based on the evaluation results. The
methods described in this section skip the measurement of the master product by
specifying the product properties.
Merits: The number of times the master product needs to be fed to the metal
detector is decreased.
Demerits: The acquired sensitivity may not be optimal if an appropriate property is
not specified. Difference in devices and installation environments may
not be considered.
■ How to change the auto setting method

1 Select “Make auto setting newly” on the

Selection of new or readjust screen and
press [Next].
 P. 30 Registering a New Product,

 P. 65 Auto-setting again (Readjusting
registered products)
2 Select “Specifies sens mode.” on the

Auto-set Method screen.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
175
■ Specify Sens. Mode
Use this mode only when the sensitivity mode of the same product has been determined
at another product number or by another metal detector with the same model.
1 Basic Operations
1 Select “Specify Sens. Mode.” on the

Auto-setting method selection screen
and press [Next].
2 Select a sensitivity mode to be specified on the Select Sens Mode (Fe-SUS) screen.
For unregistered products, the setting of [Specify sens. Mode (common)] is displayed.
For registered products, the current setting is displayed.
There are 9 options.

There are 3 options.

4 Maintenance
3 Perform auto setting.

5 Appendix
 P. 33 Registering a New Product - step 7
176
Master products are fed 5 times when

“Specify Sens. Mode” is selected.
1 Basic Operations
When auto setting finishes, the determined
sensitivity mode and the estimated
detecting sensitivity are displayed. Press
[Completed] to apply the new settings.
Press [Cancel] if you do not want to apply
the results of the auto setting.
The value of the estimated detection
sensitivity is a rough indication of the test
piece that can be detected and is not a
guaranteed value. Be sure to check the
detection sensitivity after performing the auto
settings.

Master products are fed 7 times and

missing products (NG samples) are 3
times fed when the sensitivity mode is
specified.
4 Maintenance
When auto setting finishes, the determined sensitivity mode and the estimated
detecting sensitivity are displayed. Press [Completed] to apply the new settings. Press
[Cancel] if you do not want to apply the results of auto setting.
The selection criteria for the sensitivity mode are complex, and specialized knowledge is
required for determining the sensitivity mode of products to which auto setting has not been
performed and changing the sensitivity mode determined by auto setting. Perform the normal
auto setting in [Full-auto (recommended)].
Contact an Anritsu or its distributor for service if you need to manually specify the sensitivity
5 Appendix
mode to adjust the detection sensitivity, and do not perform the specification by yourself.
177
> Correcting the Phase based on Characteristic Change (Product check function)
The product check function corrects the phase of the metal detector immediately before
starting operation. This function is effective when the type of product is wet.
1 Basic Operations
If the phase of the metal detector deviates from the optimum setting value due to a reason
such as changes in the product or device temperature, the metal detection signal
fluctuates greatly and may lead to metal NG evaluation even if the product contains no
metal contamination. Use this function to suppress a false detection due to phase
dispersion by feeding the master product at the start of operation to correct the phase of
the metal detector.
▪ As a missing product check is not affected by temperature changes, the product check
function is not required.
▪ As dry products are not prone to phase shifting, the product check function is not required.
▪ The number of master products fed during a product check is excluded from the statistics.
■ Initial setting of a product check

1 From the Menu screen, select “Maint.
and Setting”  “Functions”  “Product
check setting” to open the Product check

setting screen.
2 Select “Yes” for “Product Check Function”.
3 From the Menu screen , select “Adjust

registered products.”  “Product settings”
 “Product check setting” to open the
Product check setting screen.
4 Maintenance
4 Set each parameter.

See the following for details on setting
the required parameters.
 P. 47 Product check
5 Appendix
178
■ How to use a product check
1 Press the [Start] button to display the
data collection screen as shown on the
right.
1 Basic Operations
2 Feed master products the number of
times required.
3 When the phase correction is completed,

the message “Completed normally” is
displayed. Press the [Start] button to start
production.
Confirm the following items if the message

“Not right product. Retry product check after
confirm the products.” appears.
▪ The product differs from the master product.
 Set the correct product number.
( P. 30)

▪ The phase dispersion has exceeded the
correctable amount.
 Try auto setting again. ( P. 65)
▪ The product check has been performed on
dry products.
 Set the “Default Phase Correction” of
this product to [No] to avoid checking
this product.
If "Bulk" is specified and the processing does not advance from the Data collection screen even
after a product is fed through several times, specify a smaller value for the settings below. The
4 Maintenance
effective value of a product that is fed through for a product check might be smaller than the value
specified by auto-setting.
▪ Prod. Detection level (ML1)
 P. 47 Product check
* The default value is 0.8. Do not specify a smaller value. Adjust the setting value so that
detection is performed only when a product is fed through.
If the problem is not resolved even after performing the adjustment described above, perform
5 Appendix
auto-setting using the procedure below and then perform a product check again.
Perform "Auto-set" on the "Sensitivity Adjustment 2" screen opened from the "Basic display"
screen.
179
> Changing the Metal Detection Sensitivity
The evaluation reference value for the metal contamination (or missing products) check
are automatically determined by the auto setting function.
1 Basic Operations
Metal contamination check: Evaluation limit magnification 5.0 (MDNG resulted if the effect
value is more than 5 times that of the master product)
Missing product check: Evaluation limit magnification 0.7 (missing product NG resulted if
the effect value is 70% or less than that of the master product)
The above settings are for use under normal conditions. For higher stability or sensitivity,
change the metal detection sensitivity by the following procedure.
▪ After you have changed the metal detection sensitivity, be sure to check the detection
performance of the control sensitivity reference test piece (or the reference contaminants).
▪ The evaluation limit magnification value is set to 3.5 after auto setting, depending on the
product type.
■ How to call the Sensitivity Adjustment screen

Tap the [Adjust sensitivity.] button on the "Basic display" screen.
You can also directly tap the metal detection level bar.
You can restrict the access level. The access level is set to 1b or higher at factory shipment.
The screen on the right appears.

4 Maintenance
By tapping the [Display] button, the screens to adjust the detection sensitivity can be
switched.
1: Sensitivity Adjustment screen
2: Sensitivity Adjustment 2 screen
3: Product effect monitor screen
4: Noise monitor screen
5 Appendix
There are two sensitivity adjustment screens: the "Sensitivity Adjustment" screen and the
"Sensitivity Adjustment 2" screen.
180
■ Sensitivity Adjustment screen (for a metal contamination check)
The detection limit can be adjusted by checking the metal effect value on the bar graph. At
the same time, the estimated detection sensitivity after changing the setting can be
checked.
1 Basic Operations
[F]: Displayed for products that set the FOCUS
setting
[T]: Displayed for products for which autotracking
is used. Effect value indicator
[P]: Displayed for products for which the product Indicates the real-time Estimat detection
check function is used. effect values. sensitivity
Sensitivity mode
(Displays the
predetermined
Inverted triangle (▽)
auto-setting values.)
Indicates the relative
evaluation limit
ML1 detection sensitivity
position.

< button > button Evaluation limit magnification
Decreases the detection sensitivity Increases the detection sensitivity value
(the evaluation limit magnification (the evaluation limit magnification Tap this to directly input
value increases). value decreases). values.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
181
■ Changing the detection sensitivity (for a metal contamination check)
▪ To decrease the detection sensitivity
Increase the evaluation limit magnification if the effect of a product that has no metal
contaminant exceeds the evaluation limit due to a wide variety of effect of the product or
1 Basic Operations
the effect value is increased due to changes in the components of the product.
▪ To increase the detection sensitivity
Decrease the evaluation limit magnification if the effect of a product that has no metal
contaminant has a sufficient margin for the evaluation limit due to a small variety of
effect of the product or the effect value is decreased due to changes in the components
of the product.
Example: Product effect value (reference) for stably use

Decrease the evaluation limit magnification so that the average of the product
effect value will be a third of the evaluation limit and may not exceed a half of
the maximum evaluation limit.
1 Feed master products several times and check the maximum deflection of the
detection sensitivity.
2 If the deflection is within 2 scales, go to step 3.

If the deflection is 3 scales or more, increase the value of the evaluation limit
magnification of ML1, ML2, ML3 or ML4 and repeat steps 1 and 2 until the deflection
falls within 2 scales.
Increasing the deflection of the detection sensitivity display increases the detection sensitivity.
However, this increases the probability of false detection due to the shape of the product and the
differences in components.
3 Attach a test piece (or contaminant) to the master product, feed several times, and
4 Maintenance
adjust the evaluation limit magnification to ensure NG detections.
4 Attach a test piece (or contaminant) to different positions on the product and adjust the
evaluation limit magnification to ensure NG detections for any position.
5 Feed master products several times and make sure that NG is not detected. If the
master product is evaluated as NG, return to step 2 and make adjustments.
If a false detection occurs when only the master product is fed, Fe and SUS test pieces as well
5 Appendix
as contaminants such as rust cannot be detected.
182
■ Changing the detection sensitivity (for a missing product check)
Although the setting screen differs, the procedure to adjust the detection sensitivity of a
missing product check is the same as that of an adjustment for a metal contamination
check. See the following figure for the main differences.
1 Basic Operations
Stabilization index R
(fixed value)
Sens mode
Shows the determined
mode by Auto-set.
Common bar graph to
adjust (ML1)
< button > button

Press to increase the detection sensitivity Press to decrease the detection sensitivity
(the evaluation limit magnification increases). (the evaluation limit magnification decreases).
1 Feed master products several times and check the maximum deflection of the

2 If the deflection is 3 red scales or more (right side of ), go to step 3.

If the deflection is within 2 red scales, decrease the value of the evaluation limit
magnification and repeat it until the deflection reaches 3 red scales or more.
3 Feed a missing product (NG sample) several times.

If the deflection is 3 green scales or more, increase the value of the evaluation limit
magnification and adjust the deflection so that it will be within 2 green scales.
4 Change the orientation to feed the missing product (NG sample) and adjust the
4 Maintenance
evaluation limit magnification to ensure NG detections at any orientation.
If there is a problem with NG detection at a certain orientation, feed a missing product

(NG sample) at that orientation and adjust the evaluation limit magnification again
according to step 3.
5 Feed the master product several times and make sure that NG is not detected.
If the master product is evaluated as NG, return to step 2 and make adjustments.
5 Appendix
If a false detection occurs when only the master product is fed, a missing product check cannot
be performed.
183
■ Sensitivity Adjustment 2 screen (for a metal contamination check)

1 Basic Operations
The tab color changes in accordance with the effect value display bar for
ML1 to ML4 on the sensitivity adjustment screen. ˄ button
Increases the evaluation limit
Estimated detection magnification value (the detection
sensitivity sensitivity decreases).
Evaluation limit
Indicates the magnification value

relative Tap this to directly input
evaluation limit values.
position.
If this line is ˅ button
exceeded, the Lowers the evaluation
product is limit magnification value
evaluated as (the detection sensitivity
NG. increases).
Packaged type products: Performs auto-setting. Restore the evaluation limit

Indicates the effect values of the magnification value to its
latest 10 products. former value that was
changed by this display.
4 Maintenance
Bulk type products:

The maximum values of the previous 9 products every 10 seconds and the maximum value of
the latest product every 10 seconds are indicated by the white frame, and the changing values
5 Appendix
updated in real time are indicated by the green part.
184
■ Sensitivity Adjustment 2 screen (for a missing product check)
˄ button
1 Basic Operations
magnification value (the detection
sensitivity increases). (fixed value)
Evaluation limit
magnification value
Tap this to directly input
Indicates the values.
relative
evaluation limit
position. ˅ button
Lowers the evaluation
If the value falls
below the line, limit magnification value
the product is (the detection sensitivity
evaluated as decreases).
NG.
Performs auto-setting. Restore the evaluation limit

Indicates the effect values of the magnification value to its former
latest 10 products. value that was changed by this
display.

4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
185
> Chronologically Viewing the Effect Value of the Product (Product effect monitor)
The value of effect from products and metal contaminants can be checked by viewing the
effect value history of the last 100 products on the Product effect monitor screen. The
1 Basic Operations
detection sensitivity can also be changed from this screen.

However, the effect value at measurement is displayed for Metal 4 (detection product that
does not block the photocell).
■ How to call the Product effect monitor screen

Tap the [Adjust sensitivity.] button on the "Basic display" screen and then select 3 of
“Display”.
You can also directly tap the metal detection level bar and then select 3 of “Display”.
* Access level 2 or higher (not changeable) is required to use this function.

4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
186
■ Description of the Product effect monitor screen
(for a metal contamination check)
1 Basic Operations
ML1/ML2 tab: Displays the detection sensitivity for ^ button
ML1 and ML2. Increases the evaluation limit
ML3/ML4 tab: Displays the detection sensitivity for Estimated detection magnification (the detection
ML3 and ML4. sensitivity sensitivity decreases).
White horizontal
line
Evaluation limit
Indicates the
magnification
relative position
Press here to enter
of the evaluation
a numeric value
limit.
directly.
v button
Decreases the
evaluation limit
White vertical dotted line
magnification (the
Indicates the point where the [Clear] button
detection sensitivity
Clears the display of

detection sensitivity (detection
increases).
limit magnification) is changed. all effect values.
Effect value display [Stop] button

The effect values of up to the last 100 products Temporary stops updating of effect value history display
are chronologically displayed. The latest value and fixes the display. Press this button again to release
is on the rightmost. stopping of the effect value display update (the effect
Green bars indicate no metal contamination, values of the products that have been fed while updating is
and red bars indicate MDNG. stopped are displayed at once).
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
187
■ Description of the Product effect monitor screen (for a missing product check)
^ button
Increase the evaluation limit magnification
(fixed value)
1 Basic Operations
(the detection sensitivity increases).
Common bar graph to

adjust (ML1)
Effect value display v button

Green bars indicated no missing products, Decrease the evaluation limit magnification
and red bars indicate missing product NG. (the detection sensitivity decreases).
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
188
> Checking the Effects such as External Noise (Noise monitor)
Metal detecting signals can be viewed in real-time on the Noise monitor screen to check
whether disturbance noise is present and the value of effect from products and metal
1 Basic Operations
contaminants. The detection sensitivity can also be changed from this screen.
■ Differences between the Noise monitor screen and the Product effect
monitor screen
The Noise monitor screen displays the effect value observed at the metal detector head
even when the system is paused or when products are not being fed. This function is
useful to monitor the noise level from the surrounding area, which might cause a false
detection, and check the effect value of products that do not block the photocell.
■ How to call the Noise monitor screen
Tap the [Adjust sensitivity.] button on the "Basic display" screen and then select 4 of
“Display”.
You can also directly tap the metal detection level bar and then select 4 of “Display”.
* Access level 2 or higher (not changeable) is required to use this function.

4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
189
■ Description of the Noise monitor screen (for a metal contamination check)

ML1/ML2 tab: Displays the detection sensitivity ^ button
1 Basic Operations
for ML1 and ML2.

ML3/ML4 tab: Displays the detection sensitivity Estimated detection magnification (the detection
for ML3 and ML4. sensitivity sensitivity decreases).
White Evaluation limit

horizontal line magnification
Indicates the Press here to enter a
relative numeric value directly.

position of the
evaluation
v button
limit.
Decreases the
evaluation limit
Effect value display [Clear] button magnification (the
The effect values are displayed Clears the display of all detection sensitivity
chronologically in the cycle of 0.1 second. effect values. increases).
T he latest value is on the rightmost.
[Stop] button
Temporary stops updating of effect value history display and fixes the display. Press this button again to
release stopping of the effect value display update (the effect values of the products that have been fed
while updating is stopped are displayed at once).
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
190
■ Description of the Noise monitor screen (for a missing product check)
^ button
Stabilization index R Increase the evaluation limit
1 Basic Operations
(fixed value) magnification (the detection
sensitivity increases).
Common bar graph to

adjust (ML1)
Effect value display v button
The effect values are displayed Decrease the evaluation limit magnification

chronologically in the cycle of 0.1 second. (the detection sensitivity decreases).
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
191
> Using FOCUS Setting Function
The FOCUS setting is the function to attempt an enhancement of the detection sensitivity
for metallic foreign materials such as metallic wire that are not different from Fe- or SUS-
1 Basic Operations
metallic balls to be used as a normal metallic contaminant. By registering the properties of

OK products and NG products into the metal detector, and the settings suited for the test
pieces to be detected is done automatically.
* The FOCUS setting function might not always increase the detection probability for
any metal. The detection results might be the same as those after auto-setting,
depending on the type of the inspection products (dimensions, shape, conductivity,
etc.), metal type (material, shape, etc.), and the installation environment of the
system.
* The FOCUS setting overwrites the setting details determined by Auto-setting. The
FOCUS setting corresponds to the characteristics of metallic foreign materials.
Therefore, the sensitivity for test pieces that can be detected in accordance with
Auto-setting may decrease. After setting, check the detection sensitivity using a test
piece. If Auto-setting is required again, do not use the current settings but configure
Auto-setting.
 P. 65 Auto-setting again (Readjusting registered products – Step 3)

Be sure to prepare the following before executing the FOCUS setting function.
 Performs auto-setting before the FOCUS setting function.
 If an inspection product does not interrupt the photocell axis, interrupt it by hand when
the product reaches the detector head.
 Usually, place NG products so that the metallic contaminant passes around the center
of detector head, where the detection probability becomes lowest, in order to increase
the detection probability for metal contaminants at any position in inspected products.
4 Maintenance
 The detection sensitivity can be increased by performing the FOCUS setting several times.
 Estimated improvement rate after performing the FOCUS setting varies depending on type of
metallic contaminant or inspected products.
 If evaluation mode is “Check missing product”, FOCUS setting function is not available.
 If an NG product that has been used in the FOCUS setting cannot be set, the FOCUS setting
is not available.
 By newly performing the auto-setting ( P. 33 Registering a New Products – step 7),
FOCUS setting is restored to the default value.
 The FOCUS setting can be adjusted when performing the auto setting again.
 P. 65 Auto-setting again (Readjusting registered products)
5 Appendix
 In the case of a false detection after executing the FOCUS setting, perform the auto setting
again by using the product causing the false detection.
192
To assure stable metal detection, warm up the system after power-on

Caution for at least 10 minutes before performing the FOCUS setting function.
1 Basic Operations
The flipper-type, dropout-type, or carrier-type rejector rejects OK
Caution products and NG products used for the FOCUS setting in the forced
rejection direction. Other rejectors do not function for the FOCUS
setting. Be careful to prevent OK products and NG products to be
used from flowing to the downstream.
■ Items to be prepared for FOCUS setting
Metallic
Use the metal contaminant to be used as the metal-control criteria.
contaminant
Indicates average characteristics (dimension, weight, component, and package
state) of the products to be fed through on the normal line. If the characteristics
OK product
differ, prepare a multiple number of products. The results obtained after an OK
product is fed through 5 times will be taken as the measurement data.
An NG product is made by attaching a metallic contaminant to an OK product.
To make the detection sensitivity at an appropriate level, use all the prepared
NG product

NG products. The results obtained after an NG product is fed through 6 times
will be taken as the measurement data.
The following shows a place to attach a metallic contaminant:

Center width of metal Center height of metal
detector head opening Attach here detector head opening Attach here
OK OK
product product
4 Maintenance
Conveyor belt Transport belt plate Detection Head
OK product height ＞ Center height of metal OK product height ≦ Center head of metal
detector head opening detector head opening
5 Appendix
193
■ Setting
1 Press [Others] when the operation
stopped and press [FOCUS Setting] on
the right screen.
1 Basic Operations
2 Press [Next] on the “Start of FOCUS

Setting” screen
3 Prepare the items required for the

settings ( metallic contaminant, OK
product, and NG product) and press
[Next].
4 Press the [Start] button to feed the OK

product.
4 Maintenance
5 Feed the OK product 5 times.

If multiple OK products are prepared,
feed them all.
5 Appendix
194
Do not feed a product while ‘Wait for a
while.’ is displayed.
1 Basic Operations
6 The screen shown on the right appears
after the product is fed 5 times. Press
[Next].
7 Feed the NG product 6 times.

▼ When the message “The effect from the NG product is too small” appears
The metallic contaminant attached to the

NG product is not detected. If there are
multiple types of metallic contaminant,
feed the product with the metallic
4 Maintenance
contaminant one-size larger than that

used.
5 Appendix
195
▼ When the message “The effect from the NG product is too large” appears
The metallic contaminant attached to the

NG product has already been detected. If
1 Basic Operations
there are several types of metallic

contaminants, attach a smaller metallic
contaminant to a product and feed it.
8 The “End of FOCUS setting” screen

appears after the setting is correctly
completed. Press [Completed].
▪ Always check the detection sensitivity after executing the FOCUS setting function.
▪ If an impact of the NG product is poorly checked, the detection sensitivity may decrease.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
196
> Setting Default Values at Product Registration
By setting default values for product registration, the product inspection method and other
inspection settings can be recorded and used by default when registering products.
1 Basic Operations
This prevents product registration errors and reduces the time required for registration.
Default values for product registration
("Maint. and Setting" → "Security and rules" → "Product reg. default")
When registering an unregistered product No. in "Register new product.", the

following parameters are registered as the default values.
Setting
Name Description
(Default: _)
Check method Metal check (bulk) This is the default value of the parameter used at
(common) Metal check product registration.
(packaged) This is the default value of the "Check method"
Missing product parameter.
Product Length 100 This is the default value of the parameter used at
(common) (1 to 1000) product registration.
[mm] This is the default value of the "Product Length" and

"Product Length (L)" product parameters.
Double product No This is the default value of the parameter used at
evaluation Yes product registration.
(common) All This is the default value of the "Double product
evaluation " product parameter.
Test piece size φ0.0 This is the default value of the parameter used at
(Fe) (common) (φ0.0 to φ20.0) product registration.
[mm] This is the default value of the "Test Piece Size (Fe)"
product parameter.
Test piece size φ0.0 This is the default value of the parameter used at 4 Maintenance
(SUS) (φ0.0 to φ20.0) product registration.
(common) [mm] This is the default value of the "Test Piece Size (SUS)"
product parameter.
Main conveyor 39 This is the default value of the parameter used at
speed (0 to 91) product registration.
(common) [m/min] This is the default value of the "Main conveyor speed"
product parameter.
RJ timing Auto This is the default value of the parameter used at
(common) Manual product registration.
This is the default value of the "RJ timing" product
5 Appendix
parameter.
197
Setting
Name Description
(Default: _)
T3 (Rejector 1 This is the default value of the parameter used at
delay time) (1 to 9999) product registration.
1 Basic Operations
(common) [msec] This is the default value of the "T3 (Rejector delay
time)" product parameter.
T4 (Rejector 6000 This is the default value of the parameter used at
operation time) (45 to 9999) product registration.
(common) [msec] This is the default value of the "T4 (Rejector operation
time)" product parameter.
EXNG Delay 1 This is the default value of the parameter used at
Time (common) (1 to 9999) product registration.
[msec] This is the default value of the "EXNG Delay Time"

product parameter. (Option)
EXNG2 Delay 1 This is the default value of the parameter used at
Time (common) (1 to 9999) product registration.
[msec] This is the default value of the "EXNG2 Delay Time"
product parameter. (Option)
Specify sens. [A-A] This is the default value of the parameter used at
Mode [B-B] product registration.
(common)
[C-C] This is the default value of the "Auto-set Method”

[D-D] product parameter.
[D-A]
[D-B]
[D-C]
[S-A]
[S-B]
To register the settings of the current product

as the default settings, tap the [Set this
4 Maintenance
product as default.] button to automatically

set all the above parameters.
5 Appendix
198
199
Memo
This chapter describes the installation method of the metal detector
and the connection method with external equipment.
Selecting Installation Location and Transportation 201
Installation 204
Connecting External Equipment 206
Connecting Power Supply and Grounding, Turning On the Power 209

200
Selecting Installation Location and Transportation
■ Installation location
Install the metal detector in a location meeting the following conditions.
• Where the temperature range is within 0 to 40°C
1 Basic Operations
• Where the relative humidity is within 30% to 85% with no condensation.
• Where it will not be exposed to direct sunlight or radiant heat from a stove or heater.
• Where the power supply voltage does not fluctuate more than +10%, -10%.
• Where there is little or no vibration. Where vibration is not easily generated.
• Where the air is clean and dust free.
500 mm
• Where there are no flammable, active gases or salt sprays. Back
• Where it will not be exposed to drafts from an air

conditioner, etc. Metal
• Where the location will not be affected by detector
noise from the metal detector.
500 mm
Front
(The noise level of the metal detector
does not exceed 70 dB (A).)

• Where the space shown in the figure (shaded area) can be reserved to support
operations and maintenance. Secure enough space on the left to remove the
conveyor part.
400 mm
565 mm
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
201
■ Transportation
▪ Do not attempt to carry the metal detector by hand. Metal Detector

Warning may tip over and cause personal injuries.
1 Basic Operations
▪ When transporting the metal detector, keep it so that there is no

more than 10 degrees of tilt in any direction to prevent it from
falling. (For the KDS□□□□AB□T, within3°)
1 Use a fork lift for transportation

Do not insert forks from

right or left
Insert forks from

front or back.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
202
Only move the metal detector on a level floor if the casters (optional) are mounted.
Having the optional caster may make metal detector tip over if you
Warning move it on slope or crossing over any dents and causing injury. Keep
1 Basic Operations
Metal Detector on flat surface and do not attempt to carry by hand.
Incline Dent

4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
203
Installation
Installation
▪ Applying excessive force may topple the device resulting in injuring

Warning someone. It is recommended to fix the device with the anchor
1 Basic Operations
bracket and the anchor bolt (option).

▪ Do not adjust the heights of the screw leg too high or low. The
device may topple and injure someone. Do not tilt the device 3
degrees or more during the adjustment.
▪ For KDS□□□□AB□T, do not remove the toppling prevention clamp.
If the clamp is removed, the device may topple and injure someone.
▪ Install the toppling prevention clamp in the correct direction. If the
clamp is installed in the wrong direction, the device may topple and
injure someone.
▪ Do not hold and turn the screw part by hand when adjusting the
Caution screw leg. The end face of the threaded portion may cut your
fingers.
▪ Take extreme care to avoid crushing your fingers between the
device and upstream/downstream conveyor when aligning the
height of the carrying belt.
KDS□□□□AB□T
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
Toppling prevention clamp
204
Installation
1 Loosen the lock nut of the foot bolts with a spanner.
No unevenness
1 Basic Operations
Lock nut
Always lock
Foot bolt
No play (4legs)
2 Adjust the foot bolts to align the conveyor belt heights with the production line.

• Make sure that the metal detector does not come into contact with the
upstream/downstream devices.
• The foot bolts should not come off the floor.
• Products should be carried smoothly.
3 Tighten the lock nut of the foot bolts with a spanner.
For how to adjust the touch panel after installation, refer to "Adjusting Touch Screen".
4 Maintenance
 P. 114 Adjusting Touch Screen
Installation
5 Appendix
205
Connecting External Equipment
Connect the metal detector with I/O and external equipment.

For applicable cables and I/O specifications, refer to “External I/O Specifications”.
 P. 278 External I/O Specifications
1 Basic Operations
To connect the Anritsu rejector, refer to the operation manual of the rejector.
Do not connect the power plug to the socket until the connection is
Warning complete. If you connect the cables while the power is connected,
there is a risk of receiving an electric shock, or of damage to the
electronic components. Connect the devices and cables correctly,
following the descriptions below. Connection errors may result in
losing the waterproof and dustproof properties of the equipment.
After connecting the equipment, turn on the power and set the I/O signals.
 P. 84 Setting External I/O Signals
1 Remove the screws on both sides of Indicator to open the top cover. Next, remove the
cable screw, and then remove the cable.

Cover
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
206
2 Remove the back cover.
1 Basic Operations
Back cover
3 Remove the screws that secure the waterproof packing at the cable inlet and remove
the waterproof packing plate, the waterproof packing and waterproof plug.
Waterproof packing plate
Waterproof packing
Waterproof plug

4 Run the cable through the waterproof
packing hole and pass it through the
holding plate hole. Arrange the cable along
4 Maintenance
the detection head side surface, pass it

through the hole on the upper side, and
connect it to the indicator. Arrange the
cable so that it is not on top of the other
cable.
5 Appendix
207
5 Refit the waterproof packing in the original

position and secure the waterproof
packing plate.
1 Basic Operations
6 Fit the connector

 P. 278 External I/O Specifications
7 Refit the top cover in the original position

and secure the screws. Then fit the back
cover of detector head and secure the
screws.
Cover hole
Screw hole
4 Maintenance
Normal state Cover insufficiently pushed in
Align the screw holes while holding the top cover with the hands, and fix the cover with the screws.
If you attempt to fix the cover forcibly, the screws may be damaged.
5 Appendix
208
Connecting Power Supply and Grounding, Turning On the Power
Connecting Power Supply and Grounding, Turning On the Power
■ Class D grounding must be performed. Turning on the power

Warning without grounding may cause an electric shock that leads to an
injury or death.
1 Basic Operations
■ Make sure that the power supply voltage is within the specified
range. Running the metal detector while the power supply voltage is
out of the specified range might cause failure or fire.
1 Check the specified power supply voltage range indicated on the metal detector
nameplate.
2 Connect the power supply and grounding.
Connect to a power supply source compatible with the power supply and voltage
specifications of the unit.
Make sure to ground the earth terminal.
▼ 100V specification
Standard power supply plug
Connect the power supply plug to the socket.

If the power supply plug cannot be used,
remove the tip of the plug and connect the Ground terminal
power supply cable terminals of the unit to Brown Power supply(L)

the power supply source. Blue Power supply(N)
Green/yellow Ground terminal(E)
▼ Other than 100 V specification
Connect the power supply cable terminals of

the unit to the power supply source. 4 Maintenance
3 Turn on the power switch.

⇒ The [Start] screen is displayed. ON
OFF
5 Appendix
209
4 Maintenance
This chapter describes the maintenance of the metal detector and
troubleshooting.
Daily Maintenance 211
Cleaning 213
Installing/Removing Components 217
Check Items for Failure 229
Error Messages and Solutions 245
Adjusting Photocell 267

4 Maintenance
210
Daily Maintenance
Daily Maintenance
Applying excessive force may possibly topple the device resulting in

Warning injuring someone.
Behavior such as leaning on the device or pushing the device shall
be avoided.
1 Basic Operations
Do not operate the conveyor if the conveyor belt is misaligned. If the
Caution conveyor belt is misaligned, correct the alignment before starting
operation. The end face of the conveyor belt may touch the drive belt
and generate wear debris, which may contaminate the product.
> Daily Maintenance
(1) Before operation
Check the following items before starting operation.
▪ Touching parts
Check that the metal detector and upstream/downstream conveyors are not touching
with each other.
▪ Misalignment of the conveyor belt

Make sure that the conveyor belt is not misalignment.

▪ Checking the detection sensitivity
Feed a master product or a master product with test pieces attached (or defective
master product) and make sure that they are correctly detected.
▪ Rejection (only when rejector connected)

Make sure that metal-contained products and missing products are properly rejected.
(2) After operation

Clean the metal detector after operation is ended. After cleaning, check the following.
▪ Checking the detection sensitivity
4 Maintenance
Feed a master product or a master product with test pieces attached (or defective
master product) and make sure that they are correctly detected.
▪ Rejection (only when rejector connected)

Make sure that metal-contained products and missing products are properly rejected.
▪ Check after cleaning

Remove the conveyor part, and make sure that the belt surfaces are not stained.
Also make sure that the whole equipment is not dirty.
5 Appendix
211
Daily Maintenance
If products cannot properly be rejected by the rejector, check the following points. After the
check and the adjustment, operate the rejector to check if products are properly rejected.
– Metal detector and rejector –
1 Basic Operations
Conveyor
▪ The transfer timing for products is not deviated due the transfer error.
▪ The belt tension for conveyor belt and drive belt are strong enough.
▪ The timing belt and roller are not abraded.
▪ The transfer speed for products is not temporarily slowed down due to the collision between
the gate and the warpage or the ravel of the belt.
▪ The air cylinder or the actuator operates properly at the first run after non-working day.
– Rejector –
Drive unit
▪ The air pressure is sufficient enough.

▪ The voltage is not lowered.
Actuator
▪ The tightening screws on the gates are not loosened.
▪ The gate drive unit is not abraded.
▪ The bearing is not abraded.
Pusher type
▪ Two products are not placed closely on the conveyor at the same time (double product).
Carrier type
▪ The connection shaft is not stained.
Air jet type

▪ The direction of the air blow is appropriate.
Others
▪ The downstream conveyor is not full of products and the products do not contact each other.
> Weekly Maintenance

Check the following items once a week.
▪ Conveyor belt
Detach the conveyor belt and check that there is no fraying on the edges.
4 Maintenance
▪ Motor, Rollers, and Conveyor belt

Run the conveyor to check for abnormal noise or belt meandering.
5 Appendix
212
Cleaning
Cleaning
> Non-waterproof specification (IP30)
Washing with water is prohibited. Be sure to turn the power switch off
Warning
1 Basic Operations
before cleaning.
• Wipe the dirt off with a cloth soaked in water or neutral detergent.
• Never use a metal brush.
• Do not use organic solvents, such as thinners or toluene.
• Clean the carrying belt, roller, and detection head according to the waterproof
specifications (IP66).
If neutral detergent is used, fully wipe it off. If the equipment is operated while cleaning solution
remains on it, packing or plastic parts may quickly degrade, hindering operation.
> Waterproof specification (IP66)

Be sure to turn the power switch off before cleaning. Be sure to
Warning unplug the power cable before washing with water, and check that
the indicator cover, USB port cap and other parts are properly closed.
If they are not properly closed, the equipment may fail or an electric
shock may occur due to the entry of contaminants or water.
Do not touch the motor during operation and right after turning the
Caution power switch off since it may be very hot.
4 Maintenance
After using the equipment, fully clean or water-wash the roller,

Caution conveyor surface, carrying belt, detector head opening, etc. for the
next use. If the equipment is used without being fully cleaned or
water-washed, it may become moldy and detection errors may occur.
5 Appendix
213
Cleaning
(1) Conveyor
Wipe off stains with a cloth soaked in water or a mild detergent.

For severe stains, remove and clean the conveyor. The quick-release part of the conveyor
1 Basic Operations
can be sterilized with boiling water. The estimated lifespan is as follows:

Condition: Washed with water at （100°C）for 5 minutes once per day after normal use
(8 hours per day).
▪ Conveyor belt life: 6 months
▪ Roller: 1 year
The life depends on the usage. Use above figures as a guideline.
(2) Conveyor belt

Clean the conveyor belt after using it. If the conveyor belt is used
Caution while product residue remains on it, those areas may become moldy,
leading to detection errors.
Fully clean and dry the conveyor belt before using it. If sufficient time
Caution cannot be taken to dry the conveyor belt, prepare a spare conveyor
belt. Never use a dryer.
Remove the conveyor belt from the conveyor unit and clean it.
Examples of required cleaning

▪ Wash off remains of products using neutral detergent and rinse the belt with water.
▪ Immerse the belt in boiling water (１００℃) for 5 minutes max.
▪ Wash the belt in a solution of hypochlorous acid (200 ppm) and rinse it with water
(5 minutes max.).
▪ Naturally and thoroughly dry the conveyor belt.

4 Maintenance
▪ When using neutral detergent or a solution of hypochlorous acid, always rinse the belt with
water, otherwise packings may deteriorate in early stages which disturb operation.
▪ Do not use a soft plastic brush to clean the conveyor surface. It may accelerate wear of the
belt surface. If you continue using a worn roller for a long period, false detections may occur
due to the influence of wear debris. Thoroughly clean and remove the wear debris on the
conveyor belt.
▪ Never use a dryer to dry the belt.
5 Appendix
214
Cleaning
(3) Roller
The alumite-treated roller surface improves corrosion resistance. If the treated surface is
damaged due to a scratch on the roller, corrosion may occur from the damaged area.
1 Basic Operations
Accordingly, take care not to scratch the roller.
Additionally, the alumite-treated surface may corrode if not cleaned properly. Clean the
roller according to the instructions in the table below.
If the roller is badly stained, remove and clean it. Do not soak or boil the roller when
cleaning.
Cleaning method
Alkaline detergent ×
Organic solvent such as thinner or toluene ×
Solution of hypochlorous acid (*1) △
Neutral detergent (*2) ○
* ○: Can use, △: Can use but corrosion resistance lowered, ×: Cannot use
*1 Clean the parts with a 200 ppm or lower hypochlorous acid solution, and fully wash
it off after cleaning.
*2 Use of neutral detergent for cleaning is recommended.

(4) Detector head
Clean the area around the opening periodically. If the part remains
Caution dirty while the equipment is operating, it may become moldy and
detection errors may occur.
Resin or packing in the area around the detection head opening deteriorates earlier in
accordance with how to wash it. Wash it in accordance with the following table.
4 Maintenance
Cleaning method
Organic solvent such as thinner or toluene ×
Alcohol △
Solution of hypochlorous acid (*1) △
Neutral detergent (*2) ○
* ○: Can use, △: Can use but corrosion resistance lowered, ×: Cannot use
*1 Clean the parts with a 200 ppm or lower hypochlorous acid solution, and fully wash
it off after cleaning.
5 Appendix
*2 Use of neutral detergent for cleaning is recommended.
215
Cleaning
(5) Main Unit
The main unit is rated IP66 using the Ingress Protection Rating.
1 Basic Operations
What is IP66?
The main unit is protected against intrusions of dust and water to the interior.
It can withstand water projected in powerful jets (12.5mm nozzle) at 100 liters per minute from all
directions from a distance of 2.5-3m. (IEC 60529)
▪ Clean the metal detector using water with temperature up to 40°C.
▪ Use a soft plastic brush or cloth to clean. Use a cloth to clean the surface of the
conveyor belt. If you use a soft plastic brush, you may accelerate the wear of the belt
surface. Never use a metal brush.
▪ Use neutral detergent for cleaning. Never use solvents such as thinners or toluene.
▪ Do not wash with steam.
▪ Do not perform ozone cleaning.
▪ Wash the metal detector gently by running water from a hose.
▪ The signal tower light (option) mounted on the side of the indicator is IP54 equivalent
(not a water proof construction). So take care not to spray it with water.
> Maintenance of Stainless Steel

Stainless steel is very rust-resistant, but it is not completely rust-free under all conditions.
It can sometimes become soiled or rusty depending on the environment and usage
conditions. Periodic maintenance is required.
When any stain or rust appears, clean it by using the following methods. After cleaning,
wipe it thoroughly with water to wipe off all chemicals used.
4 Maintenance
Conditions Cleaning method

Wipe off with a sponge or cloth soaked in a mild detergent or
soapy water.
Palm and fingerprint deposits
If the stain still remains, wipe off with a sponge or cloth soaked in
an organic solvent (such as alcohol, benzene, or acetone).
Rust
Wipe off with a sponge or cloth soaked in a mild detergent or
(due to rust-promoting ferrous
soapy water.
particles or salts)
5 Appendix
216
Installing/Removing Components
> Installing/Removing the Conveyor Part
Before following these procedures, make sure that the power switch
Warning
1 Basic Operations
is turned to the OFF position.
When removing the catch clip, be careful so that your finger does not
Caution get caught.
Caution Be sure not to drop the conveyor removed from the equipment.
Make sure that all catch clips are firmly locked before starting
Caution operation.

4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
217
■ KDS21XXABF/ABFT, KDS30XXABF/ABFT, KDS45XXABF/ABFT
Remove the product guide or cross plate (optional) in advance if they are being used.
1 Basic Operations
1 Release the catch clips on side plates.

▼ KDS21XXABF/ABFT, KDS30XXABF/ABFT
Catch clips (four)

Located on both sides
of detector head
▼ KDS45XXABF/ABFT
Catch clips (four)

Located on both sides
of detector head
4 Maintenance
Catch clips (one)

5 Appendix
218
2 Remove the motor cover.
▼ KDS21XXABF/ABFT, KDS30XXABF/ABFT
Loosen the nut and remove the motor cover.
1 Basic Operations
Motor cover
Nut
▼ KDS45XXABF/ABFT

Motor cover
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
219
3 Remove the drive belt from the motor pulley in the direction of the arrow in the figure
below. When removing, the drive belt is more easily loosened and removed by lifting
one side of the conveyor slightly (side that has no motor).
1 Basic Operations
Drive belt
Drive belt
4 Remove the conveyor.

Lift the side that has no conveyor motor (arrow 1), and then remove the conveyor in
the direction of arrow 2.
Take care not to damage the plastic cover of the detector head. Also be careful not to
get your fingers caught.

Plastic cover
1 2
4 Maintenance
5 When mounting the conveyor, return it to the original position after fitting the conveyor
and hooking the drive belt on the motor pulley.
5 Appendix
220
■ KDSXXXXABW/ABWT
Remove the product guide or cross plate (optional) in advance if they are being used.
1 Basic Operations
1 Release the conveyor catch clips (at two locations).
Catch clips (two)
2 While holding the motor with one hand, release the two catch clips and pull out the
motor from the drive roller.

Hold by hand
Catch clips (two)

Located on both
sides of motor
4 Maintenance
Drive roller
5 Appendix
221
3 Lift the side that has no conveyor motor (arrow 1), and then remove the conveyor in the
direction of arrow 2.
Take care not to damage the plastic cover of the detector head. Also be careful not to
1 Basic Operations
get your fingers caught.
Plastic cover
2
1
4 Re-assemble in the reverse procedure of disassembly. If the motor axis is hard to fit,
manually slide the conveyor belt to fit the axis easily.
No gap
When installing the motor, make sure there is

no gap, as shown in the figure. If any gap
exists, install it again. A motor that is not
installed correctly may cause the coupling to
wear quickly or operational failure.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
222
> Replacing the Conveyor Belt
The conveyor belt materials are as follows.
1 Basic Operations
Top surface Core structure
Polyurethane Polyester
Remove the conveyor belt somewhere enough space available. Be

Caution careful not to drop the rollers to avoid injury.
■ KDSXXXXABF/ABFT
Removing conveyor belt
1 Remove the conveyor unit.
 P. 217 Installing/Removing the Conveyor Part
2 Remove the conveyor belt.

Take care that the roller does not come off.

Fitting the conveyor belt
Fit the belt on the conveyor and make sure it is centered.
■ KDSXXXXABW/ABWT 4 Maintenance
Take care not to pinch your fingers between the conveyor base plate
Caution and driven roller when closing the driven roller section.
Removing conveyor belt

1 Remove the conveyor unit.
 P. 217 Installing/Removing the Conveyor Part
5 Appendix
223
2 Pull the knob and close up the driven
roller assembly.
Driven roller Knob Conveyor base plate
1 Basic Operations
Take care not to pinch your fingers.
3 Remove the conveyor belt.

Fitting the conveyor belt

1 Check that the profile on the back of the
belt is aligned with the groove in the roller.

Roller groove
Profile on back
surface of belt
2 Level the driven roller section until the

knob engages with a click.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
224
> Adjusting Belt Alignment
Check the conveyor belt for belt misalignment after the conveyor belt is removed from the
conveyor and installed again or is replaced with a new belt.
1 Basic Operations
■ KDSXXXXABF/ABFT
1 When the belt shifts as below, tighten the knob 1 or loosen the knob 2.
Flow
Knob 1 Adjustment
direction
Loosen
Tighten
Knob 2
2 When the belt shifts as below, tighten the knob 2 or loosen the knob 1.

Flow
Knob 1 Adjustment
direction
Knob 2
4 Maintenance
3 Feed several products and check that the conveyor belt does not slip.
If Step 1 and 2 do not solve the meandering，please adjust the tension roller.
5 Appendix
225
■ Adjusting Tension Roller
Adjust the tension roller only when the aforementioned steps in Fixing belt mistracking cannot fix
the conveyor belt meandering.
1 Basic Operations
Adjustment
screw
Drive side
tension roller Driven side
tension roller
1 Loosen the adjustment screws and tilt the tension roller at driven side.
To perform this, refer to the diagram in Tension Roller Tilt Direction (P.225) and pay
attention to the conveyor flow direction and belt adjustment direction.
2 Take the steps for fixing belt mistracking again.

4 Maintenance
3 If the adjustment of the tension roller at driven side does not solve the meandering, tilt
the tension roller at drive side in the same direction as you did in Step 1.
4 Take the steps for fixing belt mistracking again.
5 Appendix
If the conveyor belt slips, tighten the knob and re-adjust.
226
Tension Roller Tilt Direction
When conveyor goes from left to right Conveyor flow direction
1 Basic Operations
Step 3 Step 1 Step 3 Step 1
Belt Belt
Adjustment Adjustment
Direction Direction
When conveyor goes from right to left Conveyor flow direction
Step 3 Step 1 Step 3 Step 1

Belt Belt
Adjustment Adjustment
Direction Direction

Take Step 3 when Step 1 does not solve the meandering.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
227
■ KDSXXXXABW/ABWT
▪ The water-proof conveyor normally does not require belt alignment adjustments because the
profile attached to the conveyor belt serves as a mechanism that prevents belt misalignments.
1 Basic Operations
▪ The belt might become misaligned if the metal detector is used with foreign material
accumulated on the back of the conveyor belt. Using a misaligned belt for a long time may
shorten the lifespan of the profile. Clean the front and back surfaces of the conveyor belt and
roller periodically.
1 When fitting the conveyor belt (after cleaning the removed belt or changing it), run the
conveyor for about 5 minutes and check gap A visually.
If there is no gap, the belt profile and groove are touching. Turn the tension-bolt
hexagon nuts using a 7-mm (across flats) spanner so that the conveyor belt center is
set to the center of the roller with no belt meandering.
A A
Model A (mm)
KDS21XXABW/ABWT
3.5 to 6.5
KDS30XXABW/ABWT
KDS45XXABW/ABWT 8.5 to 11.5
Fine-adjust by slightly turning the hexagon

nuts at driven roller side
If the conveyor belt slips, tighten the knob and re-adjust.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
228
Check Items for Failure
(1) If a failure occurs, check the following items first.

▪ Are the settings correct according to the operation manual?
▪ Are the connectors, cables and signal wires connected correctly?
1 Basic Operations
▪ Are the codes disconnected, and is the wiring short-circuited?
▪ Check that all screws and parts are secured tightly.
▪ Is any part of the metal detector damaged?
▪ Is any part of the metal detector rusty or dirty?
(2) Refit removed connectors and parts at their original locations after check.
(3) If sudden environmental changes, lightning, power failure due to abnormal voltage,
mechanical shock, or unusual usage are the direct causes of the fault, overall
inspection is necessary.
(4) If the operation unit or controller is faulty, use this belt as a conveyor for forced
operation.
 P. 240 Forced Operation

> Troubleshooting
This section describes how to resolve troubles.
If a trouble cannot be resolved by the solutions described below and occurs frequently,
please contact us.
In this case, please note that you may be requested to submit support data.
 P. 238 Outputting support data (only when the USB memory option is used)
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
229
■ Conveyor and conveyor belt
Problem/Request Solution Description
The conveyor does not run If the operation alarm The conveyor will not run even
when the [Start] button message of “Please perform when the [Start] button is
1 Basic Operations
pressed. Auto- setting.” is displayed, pressed if auto-setting has not

perform product registration been performed.
(auto-setting).
( P. 33 Step 7)
If the metal detector touches Adjust the conveyor so that it
the upstream/downstream is not overloaded.
equipment, adjust the
installation position.
Check the installation of the

conveyor unit, conveyor belt
and roller, and clean them if
they are stained or sticky.
If both the start button and If the error is not resolved
stop button LEDs are on, turn even after turning the power
the power supply on again. supply on again, request
repair.
The edge of the conveyor belt Change the belt. Run the new The edge of the belt becomes
is frayed. belt and confirm that it is frayed if the conveyor is run

centered. If it is running to one with the belt out of center so it
side or the other, adjust the rubs on the side.
belt tracking.
( P. 225, 226)
The conveyor belt is moldy. Wash the conveyor belt and If crumbs, etc., remain stuck to
let it dry thoroughly. the belt, or the belt is washed
( P. 214) but not dried thoroughly, mold
might grow on it.
The conveyor belt becomes When washing the conveyor Especially when products
soiled again soon after belt, also clean tension roller, retain static electricity, dirt is
4 Maintenance
washing. drive roller and driven roller. easily attracted to it so it must

be cleaned frequently.
When conveying products, the Adjust the tension of the When changing the belt,
belt slips on the rollers and conveyor belt. check the belt tension.
products are not conveyed. ( P. 226)
5 Appendix
230
■ Auto-set and assumed detection sensitivity
A test piece is not detected First, make sure that the Sometimes a test piece
using the assumed detection displayed sensitivity is the cannot be detected at the
1 Basic Operations
sensitivity assumed detection sensitivity, displayed assumed detection
not the administrative sensitivity.
The product properties
(temperature, moisture
content, shape, etc.) have
changed so it is probable that
the detection sensitivity has
degraded. Perform the
auto-set again.
( P. 65)
We want to increase the Execute the FOCUS setting. When registering a new
sensitivity to a higher level ( P. 191) product, the assumed detection
than the level after performing Run the line and feed a sensitivity displays an
auto-set. product. Check the variation of “Evaluation limit magnification”
product effect on the of 5.0.
"Sensitivity Adjustment 2" When adjusting already
screen or the "Product effect registered products, the

monitor" screen. If the assumed detection sensitivity is
variation of product effect displayed at the set “Evaluation
values (height of the bar graph limit magnification”.
on the screen) is too small,
decrease the "Evaluation limit
magnification" on the
"Sensitivity Adjustment"
screen to increase the
detection sensitivity. Take care
not to excessively increase the
4 Maintenance
Otherwise, OK products may

be falsely detected as
products containing metal.
( P. 184, P.187)
Auto-setting was performed by Select "Register new product." When the product temperature
selecting "Adjust registered for "Auto-setting" in "Adjust or characteristics (water or
products" for "Auto-set" on the registered products". salt) changes, the optimal
"Sensitivity Adjustment 2" detection sensitivity may not
screen or "Auto-setting" for be set by selecting "Adjust
"Adjust registered products". registered products" for
5 Appendix
However, the detection "Auto-set" or "Auto-setting".

sensitivity is poor.
231
When the “Evaluation limit This is not a fault. As an example, when the
magnification” is changed, the The assumed detection “Evaluation limit magnification”
value of the detection sensitivity may suddenly is changed due to the product
1 Basic Operations
sensitivity displayed at the increase as the “Evaluation properties, the value of the
same time jumps (changes limit magnification” is slightly assumed detection sensitivity
suddenly). changed due to the product may increase.
properties
When determining the best Run the conveyor from the There may be some metal
pass height, the detection “Sensitivity Adjustment” particles on the polystyrene.
sensitivity suddenly becomes screen and feed the
worse when the product is polystyrene sheet only. Check
placed on the polystyrene that bar of metal detect level
sheet. do not fluctuate very much.

If there is a large fluctuation,
clean the surface of the sheet
or change the sheet.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
232
■ Metal (Contaminant) Detection
If the LEDs of metal detect level bar fluctuate to a great amount or the inspected good products are rejected continuously as NG.
The problem occurs Check the installation Another machine (packer, filler,
immediately after precautions. etc.) is sharing the same power
1 Basic Operations
power-on. ( 3 Installation and supply as the MD, or another
connection, Operation adjacent MD is affecting the
Manual-Before Use) MD.
The problem only occurs Remove and clean the If the conveyor belt is dirty or
when the conveyor is conveyor belt. There is a something is stuck to the back
running. possibility that some scraps, surface of the belt, there is a
etc., are stuck on the back chance that the metal detect
surface of the belt. level bar may fluctuate greatly
even when products are not
being fed.
The problem occurs Change the inverter carrier Electromagnetic noise from a
when the products are frequency. Read the machine built-in inverter is causing the
moving on the MD operation manual for the problem.
conveyor. The problem method.
occurs when an

adjacent machine
(packer, filler, etc.) is
running.
The problem occurs Tighten the lock nuts on the Metal contamination
when the products are feet of the metal detector. misdetection errors may occur
moving on the MD when OK products are moving
Make sure the height of
conveyor. on the conveyor due to
conveyors and belts of
vibration effects.
upstream and downstream
conveyors match the height of 4 Maintenance
the MD conveyor.
Adjust the conveyors and

belts of upstream and
downstream machines so that
they do not touch the MD
conveyor.
5 Appendix
233
The metal detect level bar Feed the product along with a When "Metal check
fluctuates up to red but contaminant sample or test (packaged)" is selected as the
products are not evaluated as piece. check method and a product
1 Basic Operations
NG. (contaminant sample or test

Check that the optical axis of piece) that will not block
the photocell is interrupted photocell optical axis is fed,
when the product is fed. the product is not evaluated as
( P. 33) "NG" even if the metal
detection level bar reaches the
red area.
Non-contaminated OK products Adjust so that the products are If the inspected product flow is
are evaluated as contaminated fed in a line. irregular, misdetection errors
(NG). may occur.

If the product shape changes,
If the product shape is
increase the “Evaluation limit
irregular, misdetection errors
magnification” to decrease the
may occur.
Misdetection errors may occur
If the product shape changes
when the product moisture
or if the product moisture
content, salt content,
content, salt content,
temperature conditions, etc.,
temperature conditions, etc.,
change.
change, set the “Tracking

Type”.
( P. 48)
Start the "Register new
product." process again.
There are more misdetection Eliminate static charges by Misdetection errors may occur
errors due to static electric grounding the conveyor frame, when products are charged, or
charges. static discharger, etc. a discharge occurs on the top
of the conveyor.
If a product has a static charge
of 5 kV or more, use a static
4 Maintenance
neutralizer.
When using the missing Adjust the “Evaluation limit Usually the “Evaluation limit
product check function, magnification”. magnification” is 0.7 but
products with no metal parts adjustment may be required
are not rejected properly. due to the properties of the
missing product contents.
5 Appendix
234
■ Rejection
The NG product rejection Adjust "T3 (Rejector delay The reject operation starts too
timing is incorrect. time)" and "T4 (Rejector late or too early.
1 Basic Operations
operation time)" on the "Adjust
RJ timing" screen.
An excessive number of Keep the gap between products If "Check method" is "Metal
products are rejected as NG. to more than 280 mm. check (bulk)" or if the feeding
Adjust "T3 (Rejector delay interval is short, the preceding
time)" and "T4 (Rejector and following products may be
operation time)" on the "Adjust rejected in order to properly
RJ timing" screen. reject products that contain
metal.
If "Check method" is Metal
check (bulk)", one product
containing metal (NG product)
cannot be rejected regardless
of the interval between
products.
■ Statistics Control

The counts of actually rejected Increase the gap between When double-product errors
products and of NG products products. occur, two NG products may
indicated in the statistics do not be counted as one in the
match. statistics.
When a rejector is When the “Rejection hold
connected, check the time” is long, the succeeding
rejector operation timing. product may be rejected as
well.
When “NG” set to “Stop”, Any products are rejected
or ”NG Product” set to regardless of the evaluation
4 Maintenance
“Stop”, after the conveyor result, when they are on the

stops at a NG evaluation, conveyor during one second
remove the next products after the conveyor starts.
on the conveyor when the
conveyor starts running
again.
If "Check method" is "Metal It is not possible to count bulk
check (bulk)", the counter products.
does not indicate the
number of actually rejected
5 Appendix
products. This mismatch

therefore does not indicate
a failure.
235
■ Network
“E401 Network Disconnect Start up QUICCA (optional). ―
Error*” or “A411 Network Make sure that the cables and The connection of cables or
1 Basic Operations
Disconnect Alarm” occurs. LAN switches are connected LAN switches is incorrect.
correctly. Also connect the Depending on the PC used,
correct LAN port. only certain LAN ports might
be usable for communication.
Connect the cable to such a
port.
Make sure that the IP address, A network setting is incorrect.
port number, and other
network settings are correct.

Make sure that the OS and Communication is blocked by
antivirus software settings are the firewall or antivirus
specified to allow software.
communication with the metal
detector.
* Refer to the QUICCA operation manual. QUICCA is optional.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
236
■ General Matter
We have forgotten the Set the password to the When the level 1b password is
password. default. forgotten, input the level 2
1 Basic Operations
( P. 115) password to reset the default
password for level 1b.
If the level 2 password is
forgotten, it cannot be reset to
the default by the operator so
call your dealer's customer
support.
Nothing is displayed on the Confirm the setting of “Screen If the LCD screen contrast is
Indicator even after power-on. brightness”. misadjusted, it may seem as if
Or the characters are very ( P. 133) there is nothing displayed on
faint. the screen or the screen may
appear black.
Set the power switch to OFF The circuit breaker should not
and unplug the power cord trip in normal operation. If the
from the wall socket and breaker repeatedly trips, there
remove the top cover of the may be some fault presenting
indicator. If the breaker has a risk of fire or electric shock.

tripped, reset it. If the breaker Disconnect the power cord
trips again, call your dealer's from the wall socket
customer support. immediately and call a service
engineer.
The indicator or the detector When the temperature of the The machine parts generate
head generates heat. indicator or the detector head heat, which does not affect its
surface is 55C or less, no performance.
measures are required.
When the surface temperature
exceeds 55C, call your
dealer's customer support. 4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
237
> Outputting support data (only when the USB memory option is used)
If a problem occurs in the system, support data for recovery can be output.
If you are asked to submit support data, output it to a USB memory and send the USB
1 Basic Operations
memory to your dealer's customer support.
Problem occurred
↓ ←If the problem is not resolved even after troubleshooting
Contact an Anritsu sales engineer
↓ ←If an Anritsu sales engineer requests you to submit support data
Output support data
* Access level 2 or higher (not changeable) is required to set.
Support data output method

1 Tap the [Home] button to go to the General screen.
2 Tap the [Help] button, select
"Saving data for service tech.", and then
tap [Save] under "Support data".
3 On the Save to USB memory screen,

select "Support data" and then tap [Save].
4 Maintenance
4 The following file is output to the USB memory.

SUPPORT_Model_SN_Software version_YYYYMMDDHHMMSS.pwy
(Example: SUPPORT_KWS6001AF04_4600000001_V01010001_20121108122346.pwy)
5 Appendix
238
5 Compress the output file for submission.
File compression method
Example: Windows 7
1 Basic Operations
Right-click the file to be output. From the drop-down menu, select "Send to" and then
"Compressed (zipped) folder". A zip-format file is saved in the same folder, with the
same name as the original file.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
239
> Forced Operation
The forced operation must be performed by a person in charge of

Caution
1 Basic Operations
equipment maintenance only.
The forced operation must be performed in an unavoidable case only,

Caution such as a failure of the operation unit, as an emergency measures
until completion of repair.
Normal start/stop operation is invalid during the forced operation. The
operation can be started or stopped only by using the power switch.
– The conveyor section starts running immediately after the

power-on.
– The conveyor section does not stop by pressing the stop
button.
<If the emergency stop switch is provided>
During the forced operation, the conveyor starts running immediately
after the emergency stop switch is released.
Stay close to the metal detector during the forced operation.

Caution If you leave the metal detector for an unavoidable reason, turn the
power switch off and lock it. This prevents the power switch from
being operated by mistake.
<How to lock the power switch>
Turn the power switch to the off position, pull out
the yellow knob at the top edge of the handle, and
then lock it using a commercially available
padlock.
4 Maintenance
Evaluation (OK/NG) and rejection are not performed during the forced operation.
■ Forced operation setting
1 Turn off the power switch.

5 Appendix
2 Remove the top cover of the indicator.

 P. 206 Connecting External Equipment
240
3 Set the dipswitch
▼When conveyor goes from right to left
Set the dip switches S3-1 and S3-2 of the MPU2010 unit to ON.
1 Basic Operations
Dip switch S3
S3-1
S3-2
MPU2010A UNIT PAT
S3 X17
1:MANU
2:SELF Printer
X9
▼ When conveyor goes from left to right

(1) Set the dip switches S3-1 and S3-2 of the MPU2010 unit to ON.

Dip switch S3
S3-1
S3-2
MPU2010A UNIT PAT
S3 X17
1:MANU
2:SELF Printer
X9
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
241
(2) Set the dip switches S1-5 of the M.DRIVER unit to ON.
M.DRIVER
MPU2010 UNIT
1 Basic Operations
DIP SW S1
Screw
4 Install the top cover.

■ Forced operation/stop of conveyor section

(1) Operation
Make sure that there is no person around the conveyor. The conveyor
Caution starts running when the following procedure is performed.
1 Turn on the power switch.
(2) Stopping
4 Maintenance
■ Releasing forced operation


5 Appendix
P. 206 Connecting External Equipment
242
3 Set the dip switches
▼When conveyor goes from right to left
Set the dip switches S3-1 and S3-2 of the MPU2010 unit to OFF.
1 Basic Operations
Dip switch S3
S3-1
S3-2
MPU2010A UNIT PAT

S3 X17
1:MANU
2:SELF Printer
X9
▼ When conveyor goes from left to right

(1) Set the dip switches S3-1 and S3-2 of the MPU2010 unit to OFF.

Dip switch S3
S3-1
S3-2
MPU2010A UNIT PAT

S3 X17
1:MANU
2:SELF Printer
X9
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
243
(2) Set the dip switches S1-5 of the M.DRIVER unit to OFF.
M.DRIVER
MPU2010 UNIT
1 Basic Operations
DIP SW S1
Screw

4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
244
Error Messages and Solutions
For information on how to reset errors and alarms, refer to “Handling Errors and Alarms”.
 P. 50 Handling Errors and Alarms
E: Error, A: Alarm
1 Basic Operations
Error or
Displayed message Details
alarm code
Backup Battery Error Turn the main power supply on again. If this error occurs
Detected again, the parts must be replaced. Request repair.
* The set values disappear a few hours after turning the
E003
power supply off. To continue production, press the
error release key, set the relevant values, and use the
equipment without turning the power supply off.
Low 24 V Power Turn the main power supply on again. If this error occurs
E006 Supply Voltage again, the parts must be replaced. Request repair.
Detected
RJ Operation Error Products might have been detected incorrectly. Stop the
Detected conveyor, and take measures to recheck the product.
E015
To prevent recurrence, check whether the rejector is
A015
operating correctly. If this alarm occurs again, contact
your dealer's customer support.

RJ Error Detected Check the connection with the rejector. After checking
the connection, turn the motor on and then off again or
E016 turn the main power supply on again. If this error occurs
again, contact your dealer's customer support.
* For details, see the operation manual of the rejector.
RJ Output The circuit protector of the rejector output contact has
Overcurrent Error been activated to protect the device from overcurrent.
Detected Turn the main power supply off, and check that the
connection to the rejector is appropriate.
When connecting to devices other than those
E017
manufactured by Anritsu, check that the device is being
4 Maintenance
used at the rated voltage.
After checking this, restore the circuit protector. If this
error occurs again, contact your dealer's customer
support.
RJ Motor Overcurrent Check that the conveyor is not overloaded. After
Error Detected checking this, turn the motor on and then off again or
E018
turn the main power supply on again. If this error occurs
RJ Motor Speed Error Check that the conveyor is not overloaded. After
5 Appendix
Detected checking this, turn the motor on and then off again or
E019
turn the main power supply on again. If this error occurs
245
Error or
alarm code
RJ Error Detected An error has occurred in either the gate drive solenoid,
control board or connection cable of the rejector. Turn
1 Basic Operations
E020 the motor on and then off again or turn the main power
supply on again. If this error occurs again, contact your
dealer's customer support.
RJ Air Pressure Error Check the air pressure by using the rejector manometer,
Detected and adjust it to the normal value. After adjusting it, turn
E021 the motor on and then off again or turn the main power
RJ DC Power Voltage Turn the motor on and then off again or turn the main
E022 Error Detected power supply on again. If this error occurs again, the
parts must be replaced. Request repair.
RJ Gate Operation Check whether the gate is overloaded or the power
Error Detected supply of the rejector is on. After checking this, turn the
motor on and then off again or turn the main power
E024
supply on again. After starting the rejector, check its
operation. If this error occurs again, contact your
RJ CPU Error Turn the main power on again. If this error occurs again,
E025
Detected call Anritsu or its distributor for service
Rejector Setting Error Re-adjustment of the rejector is required. Call Anritsu or
E026
its distributor for service
RJ Gate Actuator Turn off the main power supply and wait at least 15
Overheating Error minutes then turn it on again. If the RJ Gate does not
Detected work after power-on, contact your dealer's customer
support.
E027 * This error occurs when the gate is opened and closed
too frequently. The frequency of opening and closing
can be decreased by changing the rejection method
4 Maintenance
from Pulse to Hold or by lowering the production

capacity.
Overcurrent Error RJ is emergency stop mode. The parts in the controller
Detected at RJ Output unit must be replaced. Contact your dealer's customer
E028 Contact support.
* This error occurs when the fuse for the rejector output
contact blows.
5 Appendix
246
Error or
alarm code
RJ Alarm Products may be stuck in the rejector or OK products
may have been rejected incorrectly. Take measures to
1 Basic Operations
recheck the product.
E031
To prevent recurrence, check whether the rejector timing
A031
and rejector operation are correct.
* This appears if an OK product has not passed
through the photocell on the PASS side.
NG Prod. RJ Error NG products may have been fed in the OK direction.
Stop the conveyor, and take measures to recheck the
product.
E032
A032
* This appears if an NG product has passed through
the photocell on the PASS side.
No Eval. Prod. NG products may have been fed in the OK direction.
Passed Stop the conveyor, and take measures to recheck the
product.
E033 To prevent recurrence, check whether the rejector timing
A033 and rejector operation are correct.

* This appears if a product that has not been evaluated
yet has passed through the photocell on the PASS
side.
RJ Alarm OK products may have been rejected by mistake. Take
measures to recheck the product.
E034 To prevent recurrence, check whether the rejector timing
A034 and rejector operation are correct.
* This appears if an OK product has passed through
the photocell on the NG side.
NG Prod. RJ Error Products may be stuck in the rejector or NG products
may have been fed in the OK direction. Stop the
4 Maintenance
conveyor, and take measures to recheck the product.

E035
A035
* This appears if an NG product has not passed
through the photocell on the NG side.
No Eval. Prod. OK products may have been rejected by mistake. Take
Rejected measures to recheck the product.
E036
A036
5 Appendix
* This appears if a product that has not been evaluated

yet has passed through the photocell on the PASS
side.
247
Error or
alarm code
Equipment was The power was turned off without resetting the
powered down without error/alarm. Click the reset button [//] on the top right of
E053
1 Basic Operations
resetting the the screen and enter the password.

error/alarm.
Air Pressure Error Check the air pressure by using the manometer, and
Detected adjust it to the normal value. After adjusting it, turn the
E061 motor on and then off again or turn the main power
NGBox Full NGBox has become full. NG products may not be fed
E070
correctly while NGBox remains full during production.

A070
Empty NGBox.
E072 NGBox Open NGBox is unlocked. Lock it.
A072
No detection of Product may be stuck in select area, or may have been
product in the RJ3 incorrectly sent onto other than the RJ3 path. Stop the
E081 acceptance path conveyor and move the product sent onto the RJ3 path
A081 back to the beginning for re-inspection.
* Appears when the RJ3 path light receiver did not
detect a product that should not be on the RJ3 path.

Detection of product in Product may have been incorrectly sent onto the RJ3
the RJ3 acceptance path. Stop the conveyor and move the product sent onto
E082
path the RJ3 path back to the beginning for re-inspection.
A082
* Appears when the RJ3 path light receiver detects a
product that should not be on the RJ3 path.
Detection of prod. in Product not inspected may have been sent onto the RJ3
the RJ3 acceptance path. Stop the conveyor and move the product back to
E083
path for prod. not the beginning for inspection.
A083
inspected * Appears when the RJ3 path light receiver detects a
4 Maintenance
product not yet inspected on the RJ3 path.

E084 reject path conveyor and move the product sent onto the RJ1 path
the RJ1 reject path path. Stop the conveyor and move the product sent onto
E085
the RJ1 path back to the beginning for re-inspection.
5 Appendix
A085
248
Error or
alarm code
the RJ1 reject path for path. Stop the conveyor and move the product back to
E086
1 Basic Operations
prod. not inspected the beginning for inspection.
A086
E088
A088
E089

A089
Overload of the Is the upstream conveyor touching the equipment?
carrying conveyor was The motor might have received an excessive load due
detected. to contact with the upstream conveyor. Keep the
equipment away from the upstream conveyor.
Is there any dirt between the belt and support plate?
If there is dirt, wipe it off.
Is the conveyor belt tension is correct?
Adjust the belt tension by rotating the tension
4 Maintenance
E141 adjustment knob.

Is the belt leaning to one side?
Adjust the center of the belt to that of the conveyor.
Are the rollers, gears, or couplings worn out?
Adjust or replace the moving parts (such as rollers or
motors).
After checking, turn the main power on again.
If this error occurs again, call Anritsu or its distributor for
service
5 Appendix
249
Error or
alarm code
Carrying UNIT Error Carrying unit error. Remove all products from the
carrying unit, and check if there is a problem.
1 Basic Operations
E161 After checking, turn the main power on again. If this

error occurs again, call Anritsu or its distributor for
service
E282
A282
Detection of product in Product not inspected may have been sent onto the RJ3
the RJ3 reject path for path. Stop the conveyor and move the product back to
E283
product not inspected the beginning for inspection.
A283
E285
4 Maintenance
A285
E286
A286
5 Appendix
250
Error or
alarm code
1 Basic Operations
E288
A288
E289
A289
Product length was Sorter detected a product length longer than the result
not correctly detected of multiplying the product length by the maximum
E290 by the sorter product length detection ratio. Multiple products may be

A290 sent onto the conveyor without any gap between them.
Make sure products are separated when placed on the
conveyor.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
251
Error or
alarm code
RJ Photocell Alarm Is there anything (a product or other object) between the
photocell and reflection plate?
1 Basic Operations
If there is, remove it.

Are the photocell and reflection plate clean?
If they are dirty, clean them.
Is the green LED on the photocell on?
If it is not on, the photocell may be faulty or a cable may
be disconnected. Request repair.
* If using a custom-made photocell, check the
documentation for the photocell before performing
adjustment.
Does only the green LED on the photocell turn on when
a product is being fed through? Adjust the photocell,
E352 checking the following.
A352 * If using a custom-made photocell, check the
adjustment.
▪ When a product is fed;
LED (Gr): On
LED (Or): Off

▪ When no product is fed;
LED (Gr): On
LED (Or): On
Are the installation angle brackets of the photocell and
reflection plate stable?
Make sure that they are stable.
If the problem is not resolved even after checking the
above, contact your dealer's customer support.
4 Maintenance
Network Connection Functions such as data recording cannot be performed

Disconnected during production. Check whether the power supplies of
the PC and hub are on, the network cable is connected,
E401
and the network settings are correct. If this error occurs
again after checking the above, contact your dealer's
customer support.
MD Head Error Turn the main power supply on again. If this error occurs
E509
5 Appendix
252
Error or
alarm code
Photocell Error Is there anything (a product or other object) between the
photocell and reflection plate?
1 Basic Operations
Are the photocell and reflection plate clean?
If they are dirty, clean them.
Is the green LED on the photocell on?
If it is not on, the photocell may be faulty or a cable may
be disconnected. Request repair.
adjustment.
E511
Does only the green LED on the photocell turn on when
a product is being fed through? Adjust the photocell,
checking the following.
adjustment.
Are the installation angle brackets of the photocell and

reflection plate stable?
Make sure that they are stable.
MD Head Sys. Error Turn the main power supply on again. If this error occurs
E524
MD TRX Unit Tuning Turn the main power supply on again. If this error occurs
E528
Reg. Error again, contact your dealer's customer support.
MD Send Output Error Turn the main power supply on again. If this error occurs
E541
again, contact your dealer's customer support. 4 Maintenance
MD Send Coil Current Turn the main power supply on again. If this error occurs
E542
Error again, contact your dealer's customer support.
5 Appendix
253
Error or
alarm code
MD Auto-balance Is there a large metallic object near the metal detector
Correction Error head?
1 Basic Operations
MD Head Sys. Error If there is, remove it.

This error may also occur when doing the following.
Check the situation.
E543 ▪ Inserting the product guide in and removing it from the
metal detector head
▪ Removing the conveyor part for cleaning, etc.
After checking this, turn the main power supply on
again. If the problem is not resolved even after checking
the above, contact your dealer's customer support.

MD TRX Unit Tuning Is there a large metallic object near the metal detector
Reg. Error head?
This error may also occur when doing the following.
Check the situation.
E544 ▪ Inserting the product guide in and removing it from the
metal detector head
▪ Removing the conveyor part for cleaning, etc.

After checking this, turn the main power supply on
again. If the problem is not resolved even after checking
the above, contact your dealer's customer support.
MD Send Output Error Turn the main power supply on again. If this error occurs
E545 * This error occurs if setting conditions that exceed the
send output specifications continue for 10 or more
minutes.
Auto-setting Error The effect of the product fed in auto setting is too large.
Check the product does not contain any metal. After
4 Maintenance
E549 checking, perform auto setting with a normal product. If

this error occurs again, call Anritsu or its distributor for
service
5 Appendix
254
Error or
alarm code
No Connection with Abnormal connection with detection head. Check cables
MD Head and connectors. Toggle power off and on and if error not
1 Basic Operations
recovered, call Anritsu or its distributor for service.
(Check the type of MD head and confirm that the
MD-SIG02 is set below.
E550 ▪ M5 S1:2, S2:6
▪ M6 S1:2, S2:4
If the setting is also correctly recurs when this error
occurs again, there is a possibility that the model of the
MD head software does not match. Set S4-4 of
MD-SIG02 to ON and download the head software.
No Communication Turn the main power supply on again. If this error occurs
E551
with MD Head again, contact your dealer's customer support.
No Communication The connection with the detector head is incorrect. The
with MD Head connection cable and connector may not be connected.
E552
Turn the main power supply on again. If this error occurs
No Sync. with MD Turn the main power supply on again. If this error occurs
E553
Head again, contact your dealer's customer support.

E554
E555
E556
E557
E558
4 Maintenance
Communication with The detection operation may be affected by external
the metal detection noise,etc. Turn the main power on again. If this error
E559
head could not be occurs again, call Anritsu or its distributor for service.
made.
Communication with The detection operation may be affected by external
the metal detection noise,etc. Turn the main power on again. If this error
E560
head could not be occurs again, call Anritsu or its distributor for service.
made.
5 Appendix
255
Error or
alarm code
MD Head Temp. Error The metal detector head temperature exceeds the
permitted limit. Inspection cannot continue.
1 Basic Operations
If this equipment is used in an environment in which the

temperature exceeds the upper limit (40ºC), lower the
E571 operating environment temperature or move the
equipment to another location. Turn the power supply
off, cool down the equipment sufficiently, and then start
using it again. If this error occurs again, contact your
MD Head Power Turn the main power supply on again. If this error occurs
Voltage Error again, the parts must be replaced. Request repair.
E572
* This error occurs due to a failure in the main power
supply.
E573
* This error occurs due to a failure in the power supply
to the board (PRE, POW).
E574
* This error occurs due to a failure in the power supply

for the SIG internal digital.
A metal detection Check cannot continue since MD head temperature
head temperature exceeds permitted limit.
error has occurred. If machine is used under an environment where
temperature is higher than upper limit (40ºC), lower
E575 temperature or move device. Turn power off, and
sufficiently cool down device before resuming.
Fan in the MD head might have failed.
If this error occurs again, call Anritsu or its distributor for
service.
4 Maintenance
E580
E581
* This error occurs when missing metal detector head
transmission data is detected.
5 Appendix
256
Error or
alarm code
MD Model Name Abnormal connection with detection head.
Incorrect The connected metal detector head is not available in
1 Basic Operations
this device.
Check whether the model name of the metal detector
head is correct.
E590 MD-SIG02 is set below.
▪ M5 S1:2, S2:6
▪ M6 S1:2, S2:4
No Communication Abnormal connection with detection head. Check cables
with MD Head and connectors. Toggle power off and on and if error not
recovered, call Anritsu or its distributor for service.
MD-SIG02 is set below.
E609 ▪ M5 S1:2, S2:6

▪ M6 S1:2, S2:4
EXT-I/O(A) unit Check connectors and cables between EXT-I/O unit and
connection error. the indicator. After checking, turn the main power on
again. If this error occurs again, the unit might have
E621
failed. Call Anritsu or its distributor for service.
* If "EXT-I/O(A):connect check" is "No", the machine
regards the unit as an unused one.
4 Maintenance
EXT-I/O(B) unit Check connectors and cables between EXT-I/O unit and
connection error. the indicator. After checking, turn the main power on
again. If this error occurs again, the unit might have
E622
failed. Call Anritsu or its distributor for service.
* If "EXT-I/O(B):connect check" is "No", the machine
5 Appendix
257
Error or
alarm code
CW-TPC/BCD unit The function of option(External prod input, Trend
connection error. control, Measured value output) does not work. Turn the
1 Basic Operations
main power on again. If this error occurs again, the unit

E623 might have failed. Call Anritsu or its distributor for
service.
* If "CW-TPC/BCD:connect check" is "No", the machine
Network Connection Data accumulates until reconnection because the
Disconnected network is disconnected. Check whether the power
supplies of the PC and hub are on, the network cable is
E930
connected, and the network settings are correct. If this
error occurs again after checking the above, contact

RJ Capacity The interval between products exceeds the rejection
Exceeded. capacity. The alarm is released automatically when the
A002 interval is adjusted to the correct value. If this alarm
occurs frequently, expand the interval between
products.
Statistics Overflow More than 1 million products cannot be registered in the
A006
statistics. Clear the statistics.

NG Rate Alarm The specified NG rate is exceeded. The alarm is
A007 released automatically when the NG rate falls below the
specified value.
Checkweigher Remove all products from the conveyor, and reset this
A010 operation has been alarm.
stopped.
CW Capacity If this alarm frequently occurs, widen the product
Exceeded interval.
A012 * This alarm occurs when 10 or more products are
tested simultaneously until rejection starts after the
4 Maintenance
product is evaluated.
Backup Battery Alarm The backup battery must be replaced. Contact your
A014
Watchdog Alarm Turn the main power on again. If this alarm occurs
A016 again, the parts must be replaced. Call Anritsu or its
distributor for service
Ope. Check Operation cannot be started since an operation check
A018
Untouched has not been performed. Perform an operation check.
5 Appendix
258
Error or
alarm code
CW Capacity Turn the main power supply on again. If this alarm
Exceeded occurs again, contact your dealer's customer support.
1 Basic Operations
A051 * This alarm occurs if 50 or more products have been
fed through during the time between T2 (Scale
balance time) and T3 (Rejector delay time).
CW Capacity If this alarm occurs frequently, expand the interval
Exceeded between products.
A052
* This alarm occurs if 10 or more products have been
fed through during T2 (Scale balance time).
fed through during T3 (Rejector delay time). This
A053
alarm occurs if 10 or more products have been fed
through between T3 (Rejector delay time) and T4
(Rejector operation time) when the ranking shift
function (option) is used.

fed through during T4 (Rejector operation time). This
A054
alarm occurs if 10 or more products have been fed
through during T4 (Rejector operation time) or T7 (RJ
check delay time) when the RJ check function
(option) is used.
A055 * This alarm occurs if 10 or more products are
inspected at the same time between product
evaluation and the start of rejection.
4 Maintenance
I/O Output signal On An I/O output signal whose output type is set to Hold 2
A071 has turned on. When this alarm is reset, the I/O output
signal turns off.
Printer Paper Out The printer is out of recording paper. Refill the printer
A152
with paper.
Printer error Check whether the printer is connected. After checking,
A153 turn the main power on again. If this alarm occurs
again, call Anritsu or its distributor for service
5 Appendix
259
Error or
alarm code
Printer Performance ▪ The printer performance may have been exceeded.
Capacity Exceeded Increase the print interval by increasing the statistics
1 Basic Operations
batch size, etc.

A154 ▪ Printing may have been attempted while there was no
paper.
Printer Performance ▪ The printer performance may have been exceeded.
Capacity Exceeded Increase the print interval by increasing the statistics
batch size, etc.
A155 ▪ Printing may have been attempted while there was no

paper.
Printer Error (Paper Check that no paper jam occurred and paper is in place.
Out) After checking, turn the main power on again. If this
A156
alarm occurs again, call Anritsu or its distributor for
service
Printer Connection Check that the printer is connected. After checking this,
A157 Error turn the main power supply on again. If this alarm occurs
Serial A, B Comm. Check that all serial cables and connectors are
Alarm connected correctly. After checking this, turn the main
power supply on again. If this alarm occurs again,
A303
contact your dealer's customer support.
* This is an error that occurs during the communication
process.
4 Maintenance
A304 contact your dealer's customer support.

* This alarm occurs if the received data is incorrect or if
the data is received at a time when the device cannot
handle the data.
A305
* The transmission capacity was exceeded during
5 Appendix
spontaneous output.
260
Error or
alarm code
1 Basic Operations
A306
response.
A307
* This alarm occurs if the flow control is RTS, and CTS
is inactive.
Barcode Data Error Reading barcode data failed or unregistered barcode
A308
data was read. Check the barcode data.
Barcode Data Error Reading barcode data failed or unregistered barcode
A309
data was read. Check the barcode data.
Serial 2 (A) Comm. Check that the serial 2 (A) connection cables and
Alarm connectors are connected correctly. After checking this,
turn the main power supply on again. If this alarm occurs

A311
spontaneous output.
Serial 2 (A) Comm. Check that the serial 2 (A) connection cables and
A314
is inactive.
Serial 2 (A) Comm. Check that the serial 2 (A) connection cables and 4 Maintenance
A315 turn the main power supply on again. If this alarm occurs
* The serial I/O unit is disconnected.
Serial 3 (B) Comm. Check that the serial 3 (B) connection cables and
A321
spontaneous output.
5 Appendix
261
Error or
alarm code
1 Basic Operations

A324
is inactive.
A325 turn the main power supply on again. If this alarm occurs
* The serial I/O unit is disconnected.
Serial 2 (A)/3 (B) Check the connection of the KWU2507A. After checking
A332 Connection Error this, turn the main power supply on again. If this alarm
occurs again, contact your dealer's customer support.
Serial Comm. Send The data cannot be sent due to a send buffer overflow.
Error Check that all serial cables and connectors connecting
the KWU2507 and external devices are connected
A333
correctly. After checking this, turn the main power supply
on again. If this alarm occurs again, contact your

Emergency Stop The emergency switch was pressed. Return the switch
A361
Switch Pressed to its original position to start production.
RJ Emergency Stop The emergency switch of the rejector was pressed.
A362 Switch Pressed Return the switch to its original position to start
production.
USB Memory Access Check that the USB memory conforms to the equipment
Error standards and is securely inserted, and that it is not
A370 faulty. After checking this, turn the main power supply on
again. If this alarm occurs again, contact your dealer's
customer support.
4 Maintenance
No USB Memory Insert a USB memory.

A371
Inserted
USB Memory Read Check that the USB memory conforms to the equipment
A373
faulty. If this alarm occurs again after checking the
USB Memory Write Check that the USB memory conforms to the equipment
A374
faulty. If this alarm occurs again after checking the
5 Appendix
262
Error or
alarm code
No USB Memory Free There is no free space for writing data to a file in the
Space USB memory. Increase the free space of the USB
A375
1 Basic Operations
memory by taking measures such as transferring the
data on the USB memory to another location.
USB Memory Access The files are either not in the USB memory, the number
Error of files exceeds the number that can be stored in the
A376
directory, or the file attributes are invalid. Clean up the
data in the USB memory.
USB Memory Output Check USB Memory is not faulty, and make output
A380 buffer full occurs setting again. If this alarm occurs again, call Anritsu or
its distributor for service
USB Memory Full Transfer data while there is still free space in the USB
A381
memory.
USB Memory Format Check that the USB memory is securely inserted and
Error that it is not faulty. If this alarm occurs again after
A382
checking the above, contact your dealer's customer
support.
No USB Memory The operation stopped because a USB memory is not
A383 Inserted inserted. Insert a USB memory, and then restart the

operation.
No USB Memory Free The operation stopped because there is not enough free
Space space on the USB memory to write a file. Increase the
A384 free space of the USB memory by taking measures such
as transferring the data on the USB memory to another
location, and then restart the operation.
Ethernet Comm. Check that all cables and connectors are connected
Alarm correctly. After checking this, turn the main power supply
A403
dealer's customer support. 4 Maintenance
A404 dealer's customer support.
* This alarm occurs if the received data is incorrect or if
the data is received at a time when the device cannot
handle the data.
5 Appendix
A405
spontaneous output.
263
Error or
alarm code
1 Basic Operations

A406
response.
A407
* This alarm occurs if Ethernet connections are not
established at transmission.
Network Connection Functions such as data recording cannot be performed
Disconnected during production. Check whether the power supplies of
the PC and hub are on, the network cable is connected,
A411
and the network settings are correct. If this alarm occurs
again after checking the above, contact your dealer's
customer support.
NTP Time Sync Error A time lag may have occurred between the main unit
and PC, adversely affecting functions such as data

recording. Check whether the power supply of the NTP
A430 server is on, the network cable is connected, and the
network settings are correct. If this alarm occurs again
after checking the above, contact your dealer's
customer support.
MD Dbl. Product Feed products so that the interval is 280 mm or more.
Alarm The alarm is released automatically when the product
interval is adjusted to the correct value.
A501
* This alarm occurs if the next product is fed through
before evaluation is performed when performing a
4 Maintenance
missing product check.

MD Performance If this alarm occurs frequently, expand the interval
Capacity Exceeded between products.
A504
* This alarm occurs if 11 or more products are fed
through before rejection is performed.
High MD Head Temp. If this equipment is used in an environment in which the
temperature exceeds the upper limit (40ºC), lower the
A570 operating environment temperature or move the
equipment to another location. If this alarm occurs
5 Appendix
264
Error or
alarm code
No Recognition of Evaluation failed because the product length was not
A604 Prod. Length correctly recognized. Specify a product length longer
1 Basic Operations
than the actual length.
Prod Jam or Length The products may have been conveyed too close
NG Error together. If this alarm occurs frequently, expand the
interval between products.
The products may have become misaligned while being
A605 conveyed. Attach a product guide to align the products,
or specify a product length longer than the actual length.
Check and adjust the RJ delay time.
* This error occurs if evaluation is not completed by end
of T3 (Rejector delay time).
Prod. Eval. Error Products might have been fed through immediately after
the start of operation. Take measures to prevent
products from being fed through for about 1 second after
A606 the start of operation (noise masking time), and then
restart production.
* This error occurs if the photocell is blocked during the
noise masking time.

RJ Interlock Error The side cover or an optional safety device such as the
conveyor cover may be open. Check that the covers are
A906 in their proper positions. After checking this, turn the
motor on and then off again or turn the main power
supply on again.
Network Connection Check whether the power supplies of the PC and hub
Disconnected are on, the network cable is connected, and the network
A930 settings are correct. If this alarm occurs again after
checking the above, contact your dealer's customer
support. 4 Maintenance
Data Accum. Start at Data accumulates until reconnection because the
Network Disconnect network is disconnected. Check whether the power
supplies of the PC and hub are on, the network cable is
A955
connected, and the network settings are correct. If this
alarm occurs again after checking the above, contact
5 Appendix
265
■ Handling of the E003, A014
The life of the memory backup battery of this metal detector is approximately 5 years.
When “E003 Backup Battery Error” or “A014 Backup Battery Alarm” is displayed, the
1 Basic Operations
memory backup battery needs to be replaced. Contact your dealer promptly for a
replacement.
▪ If the metal detector is operated continually with a low memory backup battery, the memory
may get lost.
▪ A graphite fluoride lithium battery is used as a memory backup battery. For replacement,
contact your dealer.
▪ The memory backup battery is a recyclable resource. After use, please return it to your dealer.
Warning Before removing the battery, make sure to turn the power off.
(For equipment maintenance personnel)

2 Remove the connector from X1 of the

MPU2010 unit.
3 Open the battery holder, and remove the

memory backup battery.
After the memory backup battery is removed,

MPU2010 unit
install a new one immediately. Otherwise, the Connector
X1
4 Maintenance
memory may get lost.
4 Install a new memory backup battery to Battery holder
the battery holder, and close the battery

holder. Open Close
5 Insert the connector to X1 of the MPU2010 unit.

5 Appendix

266
Adjusting Photocell
Adjusting Photocell
The photocell does not need to be adjusted because it is adjusted to the appropriate
position when shipped.
Its response when a product is detected or not are as follows:
1 Basic Operations
Detection state Photocell state
Operation indicator lamp (orange)
Operation button
Detection (the product is blocking optical axis)

Lamp
Reflection
Product plate* Green:
ON
Orange:
OFF
No detection (no product exists)
Lamp
Photocell Reflection plate*
Green:
ON
Orange:
ON

*: Install the reflection plate and photocell parallel to each other.
▪ To perform fine-tuning according to the characteristics of a product, perform the "Advanced

Adjustments".
 P. 269 Advanced Adjustments
▪ If the stability indicator lamp (green) is off, perform the "Adjustments When the Photocell Does
Not Operate".
 P. 268 Adjustments When the Photocell Does Not Operate
▪ If the operation indicator lamp (orange) is off while there are no products on the conveyor, 4 Maintenance
align the phototransmitter and reflection plate so that they are parallel to each other.
▪ If both the stability indicator lamp (green) and operation indicator lamp (orange) are off while
there are no product on the conveyor, the photocell may be defective, or the photocell cable
connector may be disconnected. Contact your dealer.
5 Appendix
267
Adjusting Photocell
■ Adjustments When the Photocell Does Not Operate
1 Initialize the photocell.
Press the operation button, and hold it until the stability
indicator lamp (green) starts to blink.
1 Basic Operations
Operation button
⇒ The settings have been initialized. Green
lamp
Orange blinks
lamp
blinks
2 Set the output state of the signal.
Press the operation button 5 times to make
the operation indicator lamp (orange) blink.
Orange
Photocell state Setting
lamp
blinks
Orange lamp blinks ON upon entrance of light

Press the operation button
5 times to toggle the setting.
Green lamp blinks ON upon blocking of light
3 Adjust the sensitivity.

Orange
(1) Press the operation button, and hold it until the operation lamp
blinks
indicator lamp (orange) starts to blink.
(2) Press the operation button once.

⇒ After the operation indicator lamp (orange) and stability Green:
ON
indicator lamp (green) turn off, the stability indicator Orange:
lamp (green) and operation indicator lamp (orange) ON
turns on.
4 Maintenance
4 Check the photocell operation.

Make sure that the operation indicator lamp (orange) turns off when a product blocks
the optical axis.
Confirm that the photocell operates correctly when the product is at the front, center,
and back of the conveyor respectively.
5 Appendix
268
Adjusting Photocell
■ Advanced Adjustments
For shiny or highly transparent products, or when detection is unstable, make
adjustments based on the characteristics of the products being measured.
1 Basic Operations
Operation button
1 Perform the settings.
(1) Press the operation button, and hold it until the operation Orange lamp
blinks
indicator lamp (orange) starts to blink.
Green lamp
(2) Press the operation button, and hold it until both the operation blinks
indicator lamp (orange) and stability indicator lamp (green) start Orange
lamp blinks
to blink.
(3) Block the photocell with the products, and press the operation Off
Off
button.
⇒ The operation indicator lamp (orange) and stability indicator lamp (green) turn off.
2 Check the photocell operation.

Make sure that the operation indicator lamp (orange) turns off when a product blocks
the optical axis.

Confirm that the photocell operates correctly when the product is at the front, center,
and back of the conveyor respectively.
If the operation indicator lamp (orange) is blinking after the adjustment, perform the adjustment
again as the detection is still unstable. If the situation cannot be improved by the adjustment,
contact your dealer.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
269
5 Appendix
Consumables 271
Spare Parts 273
Connecting the Terminal Block Connector and Push-Type Terminal Block 277
External I/O Specifications 278
RJ Output Specification 282
RJ-I/F Unit (Optional) RJ I/O Specifications 283
Ethernet Connection 286
Timing Chart 288
Specifications 289
Copyright, etc. 299
CE Conformity Marking 300

5 Appendix
270
Consumables
Consumables
Use the Product number to place an order Product number.

Model Product name Product number Remarks
KDS2105ABF, Conveyor belt L4G125321C
KDS2108ABF,
1 Basic Operations
KDS2110ABF Drive belt 84G123908J
KDS3005ABF,
KDS3008ABF, Conveyor belt L4G125321D
KDS3010ABF,
KDS3012ABF,
KDS3015ABF, Drive belt 84G123908J
KDS3018ABF
KDS4505ABF,
KDS4510ABF, Conveyor belt L4G125321E
KDS4513ABF,
KDS4515ABF,
Drive belt 84G123908J
KDS4518ABF
KDS2105ABW,
KDS2108ABW, Conveyor belt 84G901161AC
KDS2110ABW

KDS3005ABW,
KDS3008ABW,
KDS3010ABW,
Conveyor belt 84G901161AD
KDS3012ABW,
KDS3015ABW,
KDS3018ABW
KDS4505ABW,
KDS4510ABW,
KDS4513ABW, Conveyor belt 84G901061M
KDS4515ABW, 4 Maintenance
KDS4518ABW
5 Appendix
271
Consumables

KDS2105ABFT, Conveyor belt 84G270466H
KDS3005ABFT, Belt width: 50 mm
KDS4505ABFT Drive belt 84G123908J
1 Basic Operations
KDS2108ABFT, Conveyor belt 84G270466J

Belt width: 80 mm
KDS2110ABFT, Conveyor belt 84G270466K

KDS3010ABFT, Belt width: 100 mm
Conveyor belt 84G270466L

KDS3012ABFT Belt width: 120 mm
Conveyor belt 84G270466M

KDS4513ABFT Belt width: 130 mm
KDS3015ABFT, Conveyor belt 84G270466N

Belt width: 150 mm
KDS3018ABFT, Conveyor belt 84G270466P

Belt width: 180 mm
KDS2105ABWT,
KDS3005ABWT, 84G901116AG Belt width: 50 mm

KDS4505ABWT
KDS2108ABWT,
84G901116P Belt width: 80 mm
KDS3008ABWT
KDS2110ABWT,
KDS3010ABWT, 84G901116Y Belt width: 100 mm
KDS4510ABWT Conveyor belt
KDS3012ABWT 84G901116R Belt width: 120 mm

KDS4513ABWT 84G901116X Belt width: 130 mm
4 Maintenance
KDS3015ABWT,
84G901116AM Belt width: 150 mm
KDS4515ABWT
KDS3018ABWT,
84G901116S Belt width: 180 mm
KDS4518ABWT
■ Common
Product name Product number Remarks
Backup lithium battery BR-2/3AC2P 84Z166631
5 Appendix
272
Spare Parts
Spare Parts

839H279405 In the case of other than
Drive roller In the case of
839H79405D
KDS2108/2110ABFT
1 Basic Operations
KDS2105ABF, 839H279406 In the case of other than
KDS2108ABF, Driven roller In the case of
839H279406D
KDS2110ABF, KDS2108/2110ABFT
KDS2105ABFT, 839H279430 In the case of other than
KDS2108ABFT, Tension roller In the case of
839H627025B
KDS2110ABFT KDS2105/2108/2110ABFT
Motor 83G901128F
Gear head (Standard) 83G901129
Gear head (Slow speed) 83G901129C
839H279405B In the case of other than
In the case of
839H279405D
Drive roller KDS3008/3010/3012ABFT
KDS3005ABF, In the case of

839H279405E
KDS3015/3018ABFT
KDS3008ABF,
KDS3010ABF, 839H279406B In the case of other than

839H279406D
KDS3015ABF, Driven roller KDS3008/3010/3012ABFT
KDS3018ABF In the case of
839H279406E
KDS3005ABFT, KDS3015/3018ABFT
KDS3008ABFT, 839H279430B In the case of other than
KDS3010ABFT, In the case of
839H627025D
KDS3012ABFT, Tension roller KDS3008/3010/3012ABFT
839H627025E
KDS3018ABFT KDS3015/3018ABFT
Motor 83G901128F
4 Maintenance

5 Appendix
273
Spare Parts

839H279405C In the case of other than
In the case of
839H279405D
Drive roller KDS4510/4513ABFT
1 Basic Operations
In the case of
839H279405E
KDS4515/4518ABFT
KDS4505ABF,
KDS4510ABF, 839H279406C In the case of other than

839H279406D
KDS4515ABF, Driven roller KDS4510/4513ABFT
KDS4518ABF In the case of
839H279406E
KDS4505ABFT, KDS4515/4518ABFT
KDS4510ABFT, 839H279430C In the case of other than

839H279430D
KDS4515ABFT, Tension roller KDS4505/4510/4513ABFT
KDS4518ABFT In the case of
839H279430E
KDS4515/4518ABFT
Motor 83G901128F

Drive roller In the case of
839H279305D
KDS2108/2110ABWT
Driven roller In the case of
KDS2105ABW, 839H279306D
KDS2108/2110ABWT
KDS2108ABW,
KDS2110ABW,
Tension roller In the case of
KDS2105ABWT, 839H167675F
KDS2105/2108/2110ABWT
KDS2108ABWT,
Motor (Standard) 839H185610B
4 Maintenance
KDS2110ABWT
Motor (Slow speed) 839H185610D
Coupling 2 sets
Torque disk 1
Coupling 84Y170100B
Collar 1
Screw 1 set
5 Appendix
274
Spare Parts

In the case of
839H279305D
Drive roller KDS3008/3010ABWT
1 Basic Operations
In the case of
839H279305E
KDS3015ABWT
KDS3005ABW, 839H279306B In the case of other than
KDS3008ABW,
In the case of
KDS3010ABW, 839H279306D
Driven roller KDS3008/3010ABWT
KDS3012ABW,
In the case of
KDS3015ABW, 839H279306E
KDS3015ABWT
KDS3018ABW,
KDS3005ABWT,
In the case of
KDS3008ABWT, 839H167675F
Tension roller KDS3005/3008/3010ABWT
KDS3010ABWT,
In the case of
KDS3012ABWT, 839H167675G
KDS3015/3018ABWT
KDS3015ABWT,
KDS3018ABWT
Coupling 2 sets

Torque disk 1
Coupling 84Y170100B
Collar 1
Screw 1 set
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
275
Spare Parts

In the case of
839H279305D
Drive roller KDS4510ABWT
1 Basic Operations
In the case of
839H279305E
KDS4515ABWT
KDS4505ABW,
In the case of
KDS4510ABW, 839H279306D
Driven roller KDS4510ABWT
KDS4513ABW,
In the case of
KDS4515ABW, 839H279306E
KDS4515ABWT
KDS4518ABW,

KDS4505ABWT,
In the case of
KDS4510ABWT, 839H167675F
Tension roller KDS4505/4510ABWT
KDS4513ABWT,
In the case of
KDS4515ABWT, 839H167675G
KDS4515/4518ABWT
KDS4518ABWT
Coupling 2 sets
Torque disk 1
Coupling 84Y170100B
Collar 1
Screw 1 set
■ Common
Product name Product number Remarks
USB memory 84Y204604 Option
Photocell 84G901906
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
276
Connecting the Terminal Block Connector and Push-Type Terminal Block
Connecting the Terminal Block Connector and Push-Type Terminal Block
When connecting the metal detector to an external device or rejector, connect the cables
to the terminal block connector and push-type terminal block as described below.
■ Terminal Block Connector
1 Basic Operations
1 Remove the connector terminal block from
the unit.
Flat-bladed
2 Loosen the screws with a flat-bladed screwdriver
screwdriver and insert the cable.
Cable
3 Tighten the screws. *
*: For connection, remove the cable covering
4 Lightly pull the inserted cable to make sure it material for the specified length.
is secure.
5 Install the connector terminal block to the unit.
■ Push-Type Terminal Block

Applicable
PT2.5-QUATTRO
terminal block
Single wire: 0.14 to 4 mm2 (AWG26 to AWG12)

Applicable Twisted wire: 0.14 to 2.5 mm2 (AWG26 to AWG14)
cable Remove 10 mm of the cable covering material when connecting to the
terminal block.
Terminal block
1 Press the tip of the square button of the
terminal block with the tip of a tool.
2 Insert the cable into the round hole while

holding down the square button.
Square button
3 Remove the tip of the tool from the square (for tool) Round hole
4 Maintenance
button. (for cable)
4 Lightly pull the inserted cable to make sure it

Press the square
is secure. button with the tip
of a tool.
When the cable cannot be inserted, press the

square button firmly with a tool. *
AC power cable
for rejector
*: A cable with rod terminal or twisted wire cable
(without rod terminal) can be connected.
5 Appendix
When a twisted wire cable is used, remove the

cable covering material for the specified length.
277
External I/O Specifications
■ I/O Points
The metal detector has external I/O control terminals.
Standard + KCU2504A expansion I/O
Standard
(optional)
1 Basic Operations
Input
2 10
terminal
Output
2 10
terminal
■ I/O Specifications
Applicable Terminal block connector
connector (Phoenix Contact MSTBT 2, 5/8-ST-5, 08)

Conductor cross-sectional area of 0.2 to 2.5 mm2
Applicable (AWG24 to 12)
cable Remove 7 mm of the cable covering material when
connecting to the terminal block connector.
For the procedure to connect to the X53 (terminal block connector), refer to “Connecting
the Terminal Block Connector and Push-Type Terminal Block”.
 P. 277 Connecting the Terminal Block Connector and Push-Type Terminal Block
MPU2010 UNIT GPIO

X5
1 1
Output terminal
V6 2 2 OUT Relay contact ratings
3 3 250 Vac, 1A max.
30 Vdc, 1A max.
V6 4 4 OUT
5 5 Power supply for Anritsu (for Warning lamp only)

+24 V
4 Maintenance
+24 V
V6
6 6
IN1
Input terminal
Use a contact with rated
V6 voltage of 30 Vdc and
7 7
IN 2 a rated load of 5 mA or more.
8 8
IN-COMMO
G(S)
For the input part, using in the fail safe side
is recommended so that breaks can be
5 Appendix
detected.
278
■ Output (OUT1/OUT2) Diode

When used in a DC circuit
I
1. Reference circuit Load
2. Usage range V1
1 Basic Operations
Voltage: V1  DC 5 to 30 V
Current: I1  0.01 to 1 A
3. Precautions Wiring must be 30 m or less

For a coil load, put a surge suppressor diode
in parallel with the load.
When used in an AC circuit Wiring must be 30 m or less
I2
1. Reference circuit
2. Usage range V2
Voltage: V2  AC250 V
Current: I2  1 A
Load
3. Precautions
For a coil load, put a CR (0.1 F, 1 kΩ) or

surge absorber in parallel with the load. CR (1 kΩ, 0.1μF)
■ Input (IN1/IN2)
Relay contact
X53
Photocoupler
+24 V
5 mA Input switch
IN1 6 4 Maintenance
5 mA Input switch
IN2 7
G (S)
Wiring must be 30 m or less
MPU2010 UNIT
5 Appendix
279
NPN transistor connection (sink type)
X53
4.7 K
1 Basic Operations
Internal circuit
+24 V
5 mA
6 or 7 NPN transistor
MPU2010 UNIT G (S)

NPN transistor output photocell (three-wire) connection
+24 V X53 Photocell

5
4.7 K
Internal circuit
6 or 7 Control
Sensor main
MPU2010 UNIT G (S)
PNP transistor connection (source type)

The input contact of the optional external I/O unit KCU2504A supports sink input
and source input. Use the KCU2504A for connection.
4 Maintenance
2. Precautions
Use the input switch and contact whose rated voltage is 30 VDC or higher and current
is 5 mA or more.
5 Appendix
280
■ Emergency Stop Connection Specifications

Input for emergency stop is installed.
Connection
MPU2010 UNIT X29
location
1 Basic Operations
Applicable Phoenix Contact MC1.5/5-ST-3.5(SK1-5)
connector No contact is required because it is a terminal block connector.
Conductor cross-sectional area of 0.14 to 1.5 mm2 (AWG28 to 16)
Applicable
Remove 7 mm of the cable covering material when connecting to the terminal
cable
block connector.
+24 V
EMEG.SW
X2
1
For emergency stop; normally short-circuited.
Internal 2 Cannot be used when CE marking is supported.
circuit
When used as emergency stop input, use 1b contact, a
contact rating of 30 VDC or more, and rated load of 0.1 A
3 or more.
Cannot be used when an emergency stop switch is

+24 V G(S) installed.
4 Only for ANRITSU rejector

DO NOT use for other use.
5
Metal detector
MPU2010 unit
Example of emergency stop switch connection

4 Maintenance
+24 V
EMEG.SW
X29
Internal 2
circuit
5 Appendix
281
RJ Output Specification
RJ Output Specification
It is used to connect to an Anritsu rejector with a 24 VDC interface.
■ Output Specifications
Applicable Hirose Electric DF1B-20DS-2.5RC
1 Basic Operations
connector (not provided with this metal detector)
MPU2010 UNIT
RJ X4
RJ output
FET 3
V5 RJ1
4
RJ2
V5 FET rating
5 30 VDC,1 A or less
V6 RJ4
6
V6 RJ5
For Anritsu rejectors.
G (S) Do not use it for any
Photocoupler +5 V other purpose.
7
MOTOR ON Photocoupler rating
Emergency stop relay 30 VDC, 0.1 A or less
1
G (+24 V) +24 V
2 24 VC OUT
17 +24 VdC OUT

18
19
20
FG
G (S)
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
282
RJ-I/F Unit (Optional) RJ I/O Specifications
It is used to connect to an Anritsu rejector with a 100 VAC interface or a rejector of

another manufacturer.
■ Output Specifications
1 Basic Operations
Applicable WIELAND 25.640.1853.0 (terminal block connector)
connector Installed in the RJ-I/F unit.
Conductor cross-sectional area of 0.14-1.5 mm2 (AWG26-14)
Applicable
Remove 7 mm of the cable covering material when connecting to
cable
the terminal block connector.
MPU2010 RJ-I/F UNIT
UNIT
REJECTOR X2
RJ X4 X1 TO MPU
1
FG
1 1 Rejector output
Photo MOS relay
2 2 3
V2 RJ1
Photo MOS Relay Contact
110 Vac, 0.7 A max.
4 30 Vdc, 0.7 A max.
V3 RJ5
16

V5 RJ2 Photo MOS Relay Contact
110 Vac, 0.7 A max.
17 30 Vdc, 0.7 A max.
V6 RJ4 for 5-way rejection option
*: Only the K4 and K5
sockets are mounted.
Q1 5 COMMON
Circuit protector
6
Relay Contact Rating
7
MOTOR ON 110 Vac, 2.5 A max.
8 30 Vdc, 2.5 A max.
19 19
Emergency stop relay
4 Maintenance
20 20 9
+24 V
Only for ANRITSU rejector
10
DO NOT use for other use.
11
G(S)
5 Appendix
283
1. RJ-I/F Unit Position

1 Basic Operations
RJ-I/F unit
2. 100 VAC Output Specifications

■ Rejector output (RJ1 to RJ5)
2. Usage range Photo MOS Relay I1
Current: I1  0.7 A (peak 1 A) V1
3. Precautions Load
Install the CR for surge absorber. Metal detector 1 kΩ 0.1 μF
Use a capacitor with the rating of 600 Vdc or
more.
■ Mot. ON Output
2. Usage range I1
4 Maintenance
Current: I1  2.5 A 120 Ω Leak
V1 current IL
0.1 μF
Leak current: IL  5 mA Load is 5 mA or
less
(AC100 V, 60 Hz) 1 kΩ 0.1 μF
Metal detector
3. Precautions
Install the CR for surge absorber.
Use a capacitor with the rating of 600 Vdc or
more.
5 Appendix
284
3. 24 VDC Output Specifications

■ Rejector output (RJ1 to RJ5)
1. Reference circuit Photo MOS Relay
Load
1 Basic Operations
2. Usage range
Voltage: V1  DC30 V I1 V1
Current: I1  0.7 A (peak 1 A)
3. Precautions Metal detector

Install the diode for surge absorber.
■ Mot. ON Output
2. Usage range Load
120 Ω
Voltage: V1  DC30 V I1 V1
0.1 μF
Current: I1  2.5 A
3. Precautions Metal detector

Install the diode for surge absorber.

4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
285
Ethernet Connection
Ethernet Connection
The standard specifications for this Metal Detector include Ethernet (LAN) connection to
QUICCA.
■ Communication Specifications
1 Basic Operations
Item Description
10BASE-T (IEEE 802.3)
Applicable standard
100BASE-TX (IEEE 802.3u)
10 Mbps/100 Mbps auto switching
Bit rate
(100 Mbps preferred)
Communication method Full duplex
Manchester code (10BASE-T)
Coding method
4B5B/MLT-3 (100BASE-TX)
Access method CSMA/CD
Applicable protocol TCP, IP, ICMP, ARP, RARP
Connector shape RJ-45 (8P8C)
Pin number Signal name Name
1 TXD+ Transmitted data (+)
2 TXD- Transmitted data ()
3 RXD+ Received data (+)

Pin assignment 4  Disable
5  Disable
6 RXD- Received data ()
7  Disable
8  Disable
Cable length Order number
15 m 84J204319
Recommended cable
30 m 84J204320
4 Maintenance
Category 5 LAN straight cable (UTP)
■ LAN Cable Wiring

When the top cover is opened
MPU2010 UNIT
X23 Item Description

LAN
V5 ON when connected to
V5
LIN the network successfully
(Link LED)
V36 and communicating
SPD
5 Appendix
V36 ON (orange): 100 Mbps

(Speed LED) OFF: 10 Mbps
LAN cable
286
Ethernet Connection
■ Text Specifications
CD-ROM : Click on the link below to see.
 Text Specifications
Booklet : You are liable for cost. Please contact Anritsu or its distributor for
1 Basic Operations
service.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
287
Timing Chart
Timing Chart
■ Using photocell
Dbl. p. signal generates when the next product interrupts the
photocell beam before the evaluation timing of the product.
Evaluation limit
1 Basic Operations
Receive signal
Photocell signal
Eval. wait time
NG eval. timing
T3 (RJ Delay time)
T4 (RJ Hold time)
Rejects as Dbl. p. Rejects when rejection delay

alarm signal comes before evaluation
timing
■ Not using photocell (for bulk product)

Evaluation limit
Receive signal
NG Evaluation
at every 25 ms.
Evaluation timing
RJ Hold time
Reject timing
RJ Delay time
Mask time Re-triggers rejection signal

4 Maintenance
100 ms mask time 100 ms mask time

(Ignores generated NGs)
5 Appendix
288
Specifications
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
Model KDS2105ABF KDS2105ABW KDS2108ABF KDS2108ABW KDS2110ABF KDS2110ABW
Pass height 50 mm 45 mm 80 mm 75 mm 100 mm 95 mm

Maximum pass width 210 mm
Belt width 160 mm 140 mm 160 mm 140 mm 160 mm 140 mm
Display 7-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)

Preset memory Maximum 200
Product packaging Both general and aluminum-metallized-packaging products
Detection method Simultaneous 2-frequency magnetization detection method
Belt speed 5 to 90 m/min (variable speed depending on Product No.)
ABF (non-waterproof type): 5 kg [Can support up to 10 kg as an option. However, the
Maximum product belt speed will be 5 to 49 m/min]
weight*1 ABW (waterproof type): 5 kg [Can support up to 15 kg as an option. However, the belt
speed will be 5 to 49 m/min]
Metal detection Rejection signal output and beep, or belt stop and beep
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%, single phase, 50/60 Hz,
Power requirements
200 VA, rush current 50 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 90 kg 92 kg 90 kg 92 kg 91 kg 93 kg
4 Maintenance
Environmental
0° to 40°C, relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
conditions
IP30 IP66 IP30 IP66 IP30 IP66
Protection class
compliance compliance compliance compliance compliance compliance
ABF (non-waterproof type): Painted [Indicator and detector head: stainless steel
Exterior (SUS304)]
ABW (waterproof type): Stainless steel (SUS304)
Standard Interfaces USB2.0, 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX Ethernet
Other The noise level of the Metal Detectors does not exceed 70 dB (A).
*1 Sum total of product weight on the conveyor.

* The shape (length, width, and height) of products to be inspected varies with the rejector type.
5 Appendix
289
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
Model KDS2105ABFT KDS2105ABWT KDS2108ABFT KDS2108ABWT KDS2110ABFT KDS2110ABWT

Maximum pass width 70 mm 100 mm 120 mm
Belt width 50 mm 80 mm 100 mm

Power requirements
Environmental
conditions
4 Maintenance

Protection class
Exterior (SUS304)]
284 The noise level of the Metal Detectors does not exceed 70 dB (A).

* Specifications
The shape (length, width, and height) of products to be inspected varies with the rejector type.
5 Appendix
290
Specifications
1 Basic Operations


Power requirements
4 Maintenance
Environmental
conditions
Protection class
Exterior (SUS304)]

5 Appendix
291
Specifications
1 Basic Operations


4 Maintenance
Power requirements
Environmental
conditions
Protection class
Exterior (SUS304)]
5 Appendix

292
Specifications
1 Basic Operations


Power requirements
Environmental
conditions
4 Maintenance

Protection class
Exterior (SUS304)]

5 Appendix
293
Specifications
1 Basic Operations


Power requirements
Environmental
conditions
4 Maintenance

Protection class
Exterior (SUS304)]

5 Appendix
294
Specifications
1 Basic Operations

Belt width 350 mm

Power requirements
4 Maintenance

Environmental
conditions
Protection class
Exterior (SUS304)]
5 Appendix

295
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
Model KDS4515ABF KDS4515ABW KDS4518ABF KDS4518ABW
Pass height 150 mm 145 mm 180 mm 175 mm

Belt width 350 mm

ABF (non-waterproof type): 5 kg [Can support up to 10 kg as an option. However,
Maximum product the belt speed will be 5 to 49 m/min]
weight*1 ABW (waterproof type): 5 kg [Can support up to 15 kg as an option. However, the
belt speed will be 5 to 49 m/min]
Power requirements
4 Maintenance

Mass 109 kg 114 kg 114 kg 119 kg
Environmental
conditions
Protection class IP66 compliance
Exterior (SUS304)]

5 Appendix
296
Specifications
1 Basic Operations


Power requirements
Environmental
conditions
4 Maintenance

Protection class
Exterior (SUS304)]

5 Appendix
297
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
Model KDS4515ABFT KDS4515ABWT KDS4518ABFT KDS4518ABWT
Pass height 430 mm 425 mm 430 mm 425mm

Maximum pass width 170 mm 200 mm
Belt width 150 mm 180 mm

ABF (non-waterproof type): 5 kg [Can support up to 10 kg as an option. However,
Maximum product the belt speed will be 5 to 49 m/min]
weight*1 ABW (waterproof type): 5 kg [Can support up to 15 kg as an option. However, the
belt speed will be 5 to 49 m/min]
Power requirements
Mass 114 kg 119 kg 119 kg 124 kg
Environmental
4 Maintenance

conditions
Protection class IP66 compliance
Exterior (SUS304)]

5 Appendix
298
Copyright, etc.
Copyright, etc.
iWnn © OMRON SOFTWARE Co., Ltd. 2008-2011 All Right Reserved.
1 Basic Operations
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
299
CE Conformity Marking
The CE conformity marking is affixed to ANRITSU products to indicate that they conform
to the MD, LVD, and EMC directives of the European Union (EU).
1 Basic Operations
CE marking
Check the following to see whether your equipment meets the Council Directive or not.
- The CE conformity marking on the product
- Attached ‘CE Declaration of Conformity’
The following directives are applied:

Directive 2006/42/EC Machinery Directive (MD)
Directive 2014/35/EU Low Voltage Directive (LVD)
Directive 2014/30/EU EMC Directive (EMC)
Directive 2011/65/EU* RoHS Directive
*Categoryof EEE(ANNEX I): 9. Monitoring and control instruments including industrial
monitoring and control instruments.
The following standards are applied:

EN 60204-1: 2006 /A1:2009 Safety of machinery - Electrical equipment of
machines - Part 1: General requirements
EN 61000-6-4: 2007 /A1:2011 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Part 6-4:
Generic standards - Emission Standards for industrial
environments
EN 61000-6-2: 2005 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Part 6-2:
Generic standards - Immunity for industrial
environments
4 Maintenance
EN 50581: 2012 Technical documentation for the assessment of

electrical and electronic products with respect to the
restriction of hazardous substances
5 Appendix
300
301
Memo
Document No.:
84W279081-08
May 2021 9th Edition
Inner Pages Printed on Recycled Paper
Printed in Japan
Original instructions
Operation Manual Metal Detector M6-h Series

Anritsu Manual Metal Detector Kds2105anw

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Anritsu Manual Metal Detector Kds2105anw

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Operation Manual

This manual covers the software versions V5.02 or later.

(1) Structure of the operation manual

Manager: Personnel who supervises and manages the operators.

(2) Symbols used in the text

 Indicates another page for reference.

Indicates supplementary notes and related information.

Indicates the type of spanner for the work

Phillips head screwdriver

Indicates the works that use a precision screwdriver.

■ Introduction ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 3 ● Checking Version Info ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 115

■ Contents ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 4 ● Changing and Initializing Password ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 115

■ Safety Symbolsꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 6 ● Setting the Date and Time ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 117

■ Names and Functions ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 9 ● Setting Conveyor Speed ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ121

■ Description of Operation Screen ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 13 ● Statistics Control ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ122

● Security and Rules ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ123

1 Basic Operations ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 24 ● Specifying the installation check settings ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ126

■ Basic Usage ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 27 ● Setting Screen Brightness and

● Turning On/Off Power ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 27 Key Touch Operation ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ133

● Changing Access Levelꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 27 ● Entering Device Information ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ134

● Checking Operations ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 39 ● Setting a Printer (option) ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ140

● Adjusting Registered Products ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 40 ● Setting Rejector ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ148

● Handling Errors and Alarms ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 50 ● Adjusting the cross plateꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ153

● If NG frequently occurs ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 52 ● Adjusting the cross roller ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ154

■ Daily Operation Procedure ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 57 ■ Other Useful Functions ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 155

2 Advanced Operations ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 58 ● Displaying Product List ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ164

■ Screen Hierarchy ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 59 ● Copying and Deleting Registered Product ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ165

■ Viewing Inspection Data ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 62 ● Clearing Statistics ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ166

● Basic display ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 62 ● Setting All Products ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ166

● Statistics ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 63 ● Customizing the Items Displayed in Submenu ꞏꞏꞏ 167

■ Adjusting Equipment ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 65 ● Viewing History ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ170

● Auto-setting again ● Setting Access Level By Function ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ172

(Readjusting registered products) ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 65 ● Using Check Mode ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ174

■ Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 69 Methods ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ175

● Weekly Maintenance ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 212

■ Cleaning ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 213

● Waterproof specification (IP66)ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 213

3 Installation and Connection

■ Installing/Removing Components ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 217

● Replacing the Conveyor Belt ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 223

● Adjusting Belt Alignment ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 225

■ Check Items for Failure ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 229

● Outputting support data

● Forced Operation ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 240 4 Maintenance

5 Appendix ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 270

■ RJ Output Specification ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 282

Safety Symbols Used in Manual

This indicates a hazardous procedure or danger that could result in light-to-severe

Safety Symbols Used on Equipment and/or in Manual

This indicates a prohibited operation. The prohibited operation is indicated in or

This indicates an obligatory safety precaution. The obligatory operation is

This indicates a note. The contents are described in the box.

These indicate that the marked part should be recycled, or be disposed in

M6-h Series Metal Detector uses two simultaneous magnetic

The M6-h series metal detector has the following features:

High detection capability

Operator panel with color LCD touch screen

Management functions via USB and Ethernet

Standard I/O capabilities for monitoring and line

□ Operation Manual 1 set

* The test pieces are optional.

Using test pieces

[1] Operation screen

Network (QUICCA)1 USB memory2 Screen (Code reader)*3

Press the [ 转变 ] (Convert) button to